{"title":"Newest Products","description":"","products":[{"product_id":"bloomsdale-spinach","title":"Bloomsdale Spinach","description":"Bloomsdale Spinach is a classic, heirloom variety that stands out for its rich flavor, tender texture, and exceptional nutritional value. With its dark green, crinkled leaves and robust growth, this spinach thrives in cool weather, offering a bountiful harvest in both spring and fall. It’s known for its ability to grow in a variety of soil types, making it perfect for both experienced gardeners and beginners alike. Bloomsdale Spinach is also incredibly versatile, adding a fresh, earthy flavor to salads, smoothies, soups, and sautes. This variety is packed with nutrients, including iron, calcium, and vitamins A and C, making it a healthy addition to any meal. Its disease resistance and fast growth ensure a steady supply of fresh spinach for your kitchen. Bloomsdale Spinach's high yield makes it an excellent choice for gardeners looking to maximize their harvests, while its ability to be grown in cooler temperatures allows for an extended growing season.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Bloomsdale Longstanding Spinach, Longstanding Spinach, Heirloom Spinach, Savoy Spinach, Curly-Leaf Spinach, Traditional Spinach, Dark Green Spinach, Winter Spinach, Cool-Weather Spinach, Old-Fashioned Spinach.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSpinach, Bloomsdale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSpinacia oleracea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e45\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nSpinach prefers the cooler temperatures of Fall and Spring (50F-75F). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 50F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring as soon as the soil can be worked, when the soil warms to at least 40F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 6-8 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 8 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole or broadcast and separate once seedlings emerge. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. For a continuous harvest, plant successive crops every 2 to 3 weeks.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3-6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around the plants helps retain moisture and suppress weeds.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBloomsdale spinach is ready to harvest around 40 to 50 days after planting, though you can start picking leaves as early as 30 days for baby spinach. For mature spinach, look for well-developed leaves that are vibrant green and around 6 to 8 inches long. To harvest, use scissors or a sharp knife to cut the outer leaves at the base, allowing the inner leaves to continue growing. You can harvest a few leaves at a time from each plant, or for a full harvest, cut the entire plant at ground level. Be mindful of the weather; if it gets too hot, spinach can bolt (go to seed), so it’s best to harvest before this happens, especially in warmer climates. Regular harvesting also encourages new growth, extending the harvest period.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"800+ Count","offer_id":36230650462360,"sku":"SPINB","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2400+ Count","offer_id":41286556582068,"sku":"SPINB-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4800+ Count","offer_id":52513931657513,"sku":"SPINB-6x","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/Spinach1_fd7315ad-edbc-4d2c-ad80-f60ace86bd84.jpg?v=1769530037"},{"product_id":"8-species-mix-sunflower","title":"16 Species Mix Sunflower","description":"16 Species Mix Sunflowers brings joy and vibrance to your garden! This cheerful blend features a stunning array of sunflowers ranging in color and height - from 3-12 feet in vibrant yellows and oranges to striking reds and multi-toned petals! These create a lively and dynamic display that’s sure to brighten any space. Whether planted in rows, clusters, or as a wildflower-style mix, they transform gardens, borders, and meadows into sunlit havens of beauty. These sunflowers are beloved for their ability to attract bees, butterflies, and birds, making your garden a buzzing paradise. Their hardy nature ensures easy growth, even for beginners, and they thrive in a wide range of soil types. Their long-lasting blooms are perfect for vibrant cut flower arrangements that bring sunshine indoors. Sunflowers are easy to grow and thrive in most soil types, making this mix a fantastic choice for gardeners of all experience levels. With this 16 Species Sunflowers Mix, every day feels a little brighter! \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n16 Species Mix Sunflower contains a blend of:\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n1. Mammoth Grey Stripe Sunflower - Towering variety, reaching up to 12 feet, with massive 14-inch heads of bright yellow petals, brown centers, and large, striped seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n2. ProCut Ruby Eclipse F1 Sunflower - Pollen-free, 5-6-foot variety featuring 4-6-inch bicolor blooms of deep ruby-red petals that fade into soft lemon-yellow. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n3. ProCut Orange Splendor F1 Sunflower - Pollen-free, single-stemmed, 5-6-foot  variety featuring 4-5-inch blooms with vibrant orange petals around a rich, dark brown center. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n4. ProCut Plum F1 Sunflower - Pollen-free, single-stemmed, 5-6-foot variety with of 4-6-inch blooms of purple petals that transition into a pink hue towards the tips.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n5. Chocolate Cherry Sunflower - Branching variety featuring  4-6-inch deep burgundy-red blooms surrounding a dark center, growing 5-7 feet tall.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n6. Evening Sun Sunflower – Branching variety with large  4-6-inch blooms in a mix of warm shades, including deep red, burnt orange, and golden yellow, growing 6-9 feet tall.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n7. Tall Teddy Bear Sunflower - Lush, double-petaled golden-yellow variety reaching 6 feet tall with soft, fluffy 4-6-inch heads.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n8. Autumn Beauty Sunflower - Stunning multi-branched variety that grows 5-7 feet tall, producing vibrant 5-8-inch blooms in rich shades of red, orange, yellow, and bronze. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n9. Velvet Queen Sunflower - Deep, velvety-red 6-8-inch blooms with hints of bronze and gold on stalks of 5-7 feet.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n10. Dwarf Teddy Bear Sunflower - Compact variety growing to a petite height of 2 to 3 feet, featuring fluffy, double-petaled golden blooms measuring 3-6 inches across.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n11. Carousel Sunflower - Dwarf, 3-4 foot variety with multi-branching habit with little lower stem showing. Plants are covered with in leaves and 4-6-inch wide lemon-yellow blooms.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n12. Lemon Queen Sunflower - Vibrant variety featuring bright, cheerful yellow petals surrounding a dark center. Grows 5 to 6 feet tall with heads up to 5 inches across.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n13. Dwarf Sunspot Sunflower - Dwarf variety, featuring large, bright yellow blooms, reaching up to 10 inches across on heights of 2-3 feet.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n14. Earthwalker Sunflower - Branching variety with earthy-toned blooms  sized 3-6-inches in shades of deep red, burnt orange, copper, and golden yellow, growing 6-9 feet.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n15. Red Sun Sunflower - Branching variety featuring rich, velvety red 3-6-inch blooms with dark centers, growing 5-7 feet tall.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n16. Yellow Peredovik Sunflower – Classic golden-yellow petals surrounding a black center with heads that are 3-5 inches in diameter on sturdy stems, growing 5-7 feet tall.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Custom Sunflower Variety Mix, Custom Blend of Sunflowers, Sunflower Mix to Order, 16 Varieties Sunflower Mix, 16 Species Sunflower Blend, Multi-Species Sunflower Mix, 16 Types Sunflower Blend, Diverse Sunflower Variety Mix, Mixed Species Sunflowers.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSunflower; Mammoth Grey Stripe, ProCut Ruby Eclipse F1, ProCut Orange Splendor F1, ProCut Plum F1, Chocolate Cherry, Evening Sun, Tall Teddy Bear, Autumn Beauty, Velvet Queen, Dwarf Teddy Bear, Evening Sun, Lemon Queen, Dwarf Sunspot, Earthwalker, Red Sun, Yellow Peredovik\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHelianthus annuus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e75-120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 12 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 30 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 14 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated, Hybrid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 1-2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003e For earlier Sunflower blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 65F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant after all danger of frost has passed in spring and soil temperatures reach at least 60F. Fall planting is not recommended unless planting outdoors in environments with mild, frost-free winters for a head start in the following spring, or planting indoors with supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1-2 inches deep and spaced 4-6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds.In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered then covered with soil. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 4-6 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding. Water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-2 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-2 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nSunflowers are relatively drought-tolerant once established and require minimal care but thrive with full sun for at least 6-8 hours daily and regular watering, especially during dry spells. Water deeply at the base of sunflower plants. Fertilization is usually unnecessary if the soil is already nutrient-rich, but for poor soil, a balanced fertilizer at planting and once again midway through the growing season can help promote healthy growth. While sunflowers are hardy, larger plants may need staking to prevent them from falling over in windy conditions. To harvest, once the sunflowers bloom and the flower heads mature, leave the seeds to ripen fully while still attached to the plant. Harvest the flower heads when the petals start to dry and the seeds appear plump and firm, cutting the head with a portion of the stem. Properly dried flower heads can be stored for seed saving or enjoyed as beautiful dried arrangements.\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"800+ Count","offer_id":49231376941353,"sku":"SUNMIX","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2400+ Count","offer_id":49231376974121,"sku":"SUNMIX-3x","price":12.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4800+ Count","offer_id":52513939292457,"sku":"SUNMIX-6x","price":18.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52513939325225,"sku":"SUNMIX-1\/4LB","price":20.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52513939357993,"sku":"SUNMIX-1\/2LB","price":28.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52513939390761,"sku":"SUNMIX-1LB","price":36.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/SUNMIX161_44e248c9-d5e3-4172-a1cb-6311c78053d9.png?v=1769530135"},{"product_id":"table-king-bush-acorn-squash","title":"Table King Bush Acorn Squash","description":"Table King Bush Acorn Squash is an AAS Winner! Producing 2-pound glossy, dark green, ribbed acorn-shaped fruits with a sweet yellow-orange flesh. This compact bush-type variety is ideal for containers and small gardens! Delicious stuffed, baked, roasted, and in soups, stews, and chutneys. Acorn squash is also nutrient-rich in dietary fiber and potassium and high in vitamins C and B, magnesium.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAcorn Squash is one of the plants grown in the traditional Native American vegetable growing technique called the Three Sisters. The other two plants in the Three Sisters are beans and corn. Each plant had its role in this companion planting tradition. Corn served as a structure for the vining beans to grow up. Squash served as a ground cover to prevent weeds from growing. Beans provided natural fertilizer for all.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Pepper Squash, Des Moines Squash, Danish Squash, Table Queen Squash, Winter Acorn Squash, Green Acorn Squash, White Acorn Squash, Golden Acorn Squash, Bush Acorn Squash, Autumn Acorn Squash.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eWinter Squash, Table King Bush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCucurbita pepo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4 - 6 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nSquash grows best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant squash in the spring after all danger of frost has passed and the soil begins to warm. Planting early ensures squash will mature before the first killing frost. To plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 2-3 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, wait until seedlings grow 1-2 sets of leaves before determining the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-6 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants enough to keep them from wilting. If the weather is really dry, water squash plants at least once a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping squash plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e When blooms first appear, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of fertilizer around each hole, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nAcorn squash is ready to harvest when the skin turns dark green with an orange patch where it rested on the ground, and the rind becomes hard and resistant to scratching. The stem will also dry and turn brown, and the squash should reach its full size of 4–7 inches. It’s typically ready 75–100 days after planting and should be picked before the first frost. Use pruning shears to cut the squash, leaving 1–2 inches of stem attached for better storage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"30+ Count","offer_id":44483006136617,"sku":"ACORN","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"90+ Count","offer_id":52441775669545,"sku":"ACORN-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/acorn14_197df8f6-cc4b-4bb2-8902-828a5330dd69.png?v=1768407569"},{"product_id":"adzuki-red-bean","title":"Adzuki Red Bean","description":"Adzuki or \"Azuki\" bean is wildly cultivated through East Asia for its sweet and nutty flavor and red color, symbolic of good luck. Adzuki beans have a long history in Eastern Asia, used in events and ceremonies and even as medicine. Packed with protein and fiber, they make a nutritious and filling option for a variety of dishes. These beans have a mildly sweet flavor, which adds a delightful touch to both savory recipes like soups and stir-fries and sweet treats such as desserts or bean pastes for pastries. Adzuki bean is rich in protein and dietary fiber, as well as manganese, iron, and B vitamins. Whether you're looking to boost your protein intake or experiment with new flavors, Adzuki Beans are a positive addition to your garden.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Azuki Bean, Red Mung Bean, Chinese Red Bean, Aduki Bean, Oriental Bean, Tiensin Red Bean, Vigna Angularis, Red Cowpea, Japanese Red Bean, Small Red Bean.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAdzuki Bean\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVigna angularis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of a low-nitrogen fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a low-nitrogen fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant Adzuki Beans in the spring after all danger of frost has passed and the soil temperature reaches at least 60F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds or transplant seedlings outdoors 10-12 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 3 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1-2 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Water especially during flowering and pod formation. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once plants start forming pods, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a low-nitrogen fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nAdzuki beans are ready to harvest when the pods are fully mature and have dried on the plant. This typically occurs about 90-120 days after planting, depending on the growing conditions. Look for pods that are brown, dry, and brittle, indicating the beans inside have reached maturity. If harvesting for fresh beans, pick the pods when they are plump and green, but for dried beans (the most common use), wait until the pods are completely dry. Harvest before frost, as cold weather can damage the beans. To collect, simply pull the pods from the plant and shell the beans, or pull up the entire plant to dry indoors if wet weather threatens.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"50+ Count","offer_id":36336649502872,"sku":"ADZ","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"150+ Count","offer_id":52441777242409,"sku":"ADZ-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/adz32_d94100ab-b223-44b5-8730-b91c9b5ec418.jpg?v=1768407572"},{"product_id":"astro-arugula","title":"Astro Arugula","description":"Astro Arugula is a fast-growing, fresh, tart, bitter, peppery leafy green that is a must-have for any garden. Its bold taste adds a unique kick to salads, sandwiches, and a variety of dishes.Arugula is popularly used as a salad green but can be used in lieu of most lettuces and herbs, such as in pestos, sauces, sandwiches, pizzas, and pastas for an added flair. Arugula is incredibly nutritious, packed with vitamins A, C, and K, as well as beneficial antioxidants. It's a versatile crop that thrives in cooler weather, making it ideal for spring and fall planting. Its rapid growth means you'll have a quick harvest, perfect for those who want to enjoy homegrown greens without a long wait. Additionally, arugula's tender leaves are easy to harvest and can be enjoyed fresh or cooked, making it a versatile addition to your garden and kitchen. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Astro Rocket, Astro Salad Rocket, Astro Arugula, Garden Rocket, Roquette, Eruca, Rocket Lettuce, Rucola, Wild Rocket, Arugula Rocket, and Italian Cress.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eArugula, Astro\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eEruca vesicaria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4-7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e50\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant arugula in the spring after all danger of frost has passed as soon as the soil can be worked. For fall crops, direct sow seeds or transplant seedlings outdoors 4-6 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 5 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin plants after germination, plant seeds 1 inch apart then thin to 6 inches apart after emergence to give plants more spacing for larger growth. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Additional fertilizing is usually not needed. If growth is slow or leaves are smaller than expected, you may optionally apply a light dressing of a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nArugula is ready to harvest about 3 to 4 weeks after planting, when the leaves are young, tender, and vibrant green. If you're harvesting the entire plant, wait until it reaches around 4 to 6 inches tall. For a continuous supply of fresh arugula, you can harvest the outer leaves first, leaving the inner leaves to keep growing. Arugula can be harvested multiple times throughout the season, as it grows continuously.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"5000+ Count","offer_id":36354953674904,"sku":"ARUG","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"15,000+ Count","offer_id":50105459704105,"sku":"ARUG-3x","price":12.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound","offer_id":52441319178537,"sku":"ARUG-1\/2LB","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound","offer_id":52441319211305,"sku":"ARUG-1LB","price":20.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 Pounds","offer_id":52441319244073,"sku":"ARUG-3LB","price":36.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/Arugula3_dfcd1ed1-4440-4aca-b521-18c2fcd35a38.jpg?v=1769540812"},{"product_id":"honey-rock-cantaloupe","title":"Honey Rock Cantaloupe","description":"Honey Rock Cantaloupe is named for it's unique rock-like exterior and its sweet, honey-flavored orange flesh! The melon’s orange flesh is both vibrant and flavorful, providing a refreshing and satisfying taste that’s perfect for summer. A high-yielder, Honey Rock produces 5-7 large fruits, 6-7 inches in diameter, a vine. Its thick gray-green skin makes it sturdy for growth and ideal for travel. Its thick, netted rind helps to protect the delicious fruit inside, making it easy to slice and enjoy. Packed with vitamins and hydration, Honey Rock Cantaloupe is a nutritious addition to any diet, offering a natural source of vitamin C, potassium, and fiber. Prepare into fresh fruit, salads, pressed in sorbets and drinks, wrapped in prosciutto, or desserts. A rich source of potassium, vitamin A, and vitamin C.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Sugar Melon, Honeydew, Sweet Melon, Cantaloupe, Muskmelon, Rockmelon, Orange Melon, Netted Melon, Antilles Melon, Golden Cantaloupe.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eMelon, Honey Rock Cantaloupe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCucumis melo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e85\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-6 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 6 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCantaloupe melons grow best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 3-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Cantaloupe melon outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. If Fall planting, sow in early summer, at least 13-16 weeks before the first expected frost date - or if growing indoors, keep at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 3 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish, spacing plants 18 inches apart at the base of the trellis.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (sprawl) or 18 inches (trellis)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCantaloupe melons are ready to harvest when they have reached full size and their skin color has changed to a golden or yellowish hue. The melon should feel heavy for its size, indicating it has reached its peak ripeness. Gently press on the top near the stem - if it slightly indents, it is a good sign the melon is ready. The stem should also begin to dry and separate easily from the fruit. For the best flavor, harvest cantaloupe when it has a strong, sweet aroma and the skin underneath is slightly netted. When harvesting, use a sharp knife or pruning shears to cut the melon from the vine, leaving a short piece of stem attached to the fruit.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"100+ Count","offer_id":36355028943000,"sku":"CANTHR","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":40886139879604,"sku":"CANTHR-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"100+ Count \u0026 100+ Rocky Ford Green Cantaloupe","offer_id":52448142721321,"sku":"CANTHR+CANTRF","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"100+ Count \u0026 100+ Green Flesh Honeydew","offer_id":52448142754089,"sku":"CANTHR+HONGF","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cantaloupe1_9d150da2-a6a7-42e9-b278-14f8120070b1.jpg?v=1768495854"},{"product_id":"autumn-beauty-sunflower","title":"Autumn Beauty Sunflower","description":"Autumn Beauty Sunflowers are a captivating blend of warm, rich colors ofa mix of vibrant golden yellows, deep oranges, rusty reds, and bicolored petals, reminiscent of fall leaves. These beautiful sunflowers feature creating a striking visual display with 5-6-inch-diameter heads. Standing tall with strong, sturdy stems, they make a bold statement in flower beds, borders, or as a backdrop to other plants. Each flower head is large, with multiple blooms that attract bees, butterflies, and birds, making them an excellent choice for pollinator-friendly gardens. Autumn Beauty Sunflowers are easy to grow, flourishing in full sun with minimal maintenance, making them a perfect choice for both novice and seasoned gardeners. These sunflowers are also highly versatile, perfect for cutting and creating beautiful bouquets that capture the essence of autumn. The plant’s height and sturdy stems ensure they create an eye-catching presence in the landscape, while the seeds can be harvested for snacking or for feeding birds.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Autumn Beauty Sunflower Mix, Autumn Sunset Sunflowers, Autumn Colors Sunflowers, Fall Beauty Sunflowers, Mixed Autumn Beauty Sunflowers, Autumn Glory Sunflowers, Golden Autumn Sunflowers.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSunflower, Autumn Beauty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHelianthus annuus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e75-90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5 - 8 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 30 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5 - 8 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 1-2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003e For earlier Sunflower blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 65F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant after all danger of frost has passed in spring and soil temperatures reach at least 60F. Fall planting is not recommended unless planting outdoors in environments with mild, frost-free winters for a head start in the following spring, or planting indoors with supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1-2 inches deep and spaced 4-6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds.In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered then covered with soil. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 4-6 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding. Water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-2 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-2 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nSunflowers are relatively drought-tolerant once established and require minimal care but thrive with full sun for at least 6-8 hours daily and regular watering, especially during dry spells. Water deeply at the base of sunflower plants. Fertilization is usually unnecessary if the soil is already nutrient-rich, but for poor soil, a balanced fertilizer at planting and once again midway through the growing season can help promote healthy growth. While sunflowers are hardy, larger plants may need staking to prevent them from falling over in windy conditions. To harvest, once the sunflowers bloom and the flower heads mature, leave the seeds to ripen fully while still attached to the plant. Harvest the flower heads when the petals start to dry and the seeds appear plump and firm, cutting the head with a portion of the stem. Properly dried flower heads can be stored for seed saving or enjoyed as beautiful dried arrangements.\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"200+ Count","offer_id":46954228777257,"sku":"SUNAB","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"600+ Count","offer_id":46954228810025,"sku":"SUNAB-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Ounce Bulk ~ 1700+ Count","offer_id":52513935687977,"sku":"SUNAB-1OZ","price":10.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52513935720745,"sku":"SUNAB-1\/4LB","price":20.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52513935753513,"sku":"SUNAB-1\/2LB","price":27.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52513935786281,"sku":"SUNAB-1LB","price":34.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"200+ Count \u0026 50+ Peredovik Sunflower","offer_id":52513935819049,"sku":"SUNAB+SUN","price":5.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/autumn2_a5969ab1-4309-422f-be6a-34874863d64d.jpg?v=1769530100"},{"product_id":"banana-pepper","title":"Banana Pepper","description":"Banana Pepper is a bright yellow, banana-shaped medium-sized pepper growing 6-8 inches long. It has a sweet, tangy taste and crunchy texture. These peppers are known for their crisp texture and bright, sweet flavor with just a touch of heat, making them versatile for everything from pickling to fresh salads. They thrive in warm climates and produce a generous harvest of peppers that can be enjoyed fresh or preserved for later use. Banana Peppers are excellent for making your own homemade pickles, adding a sweet and sour tang that enhances sandwiches, burgers, pizzas, salads, and wraps. They’re also a wonderful addition to pasta dishes, stir-fries, casseroles, and salsas, offering a mild heat that doesn’t overwhelm the palate. Rich in vitamins A and C, Banana Peppers offer nutritional benefits while bringing a burst of flavor to your meals. While typically bright yellow, they may change to green, red, or orange as they ripen. Whether you're looking to spice up your dishes or simply enjoy their beauty in your garden, Banana Peppers are a rewarding and tasty variety to grow. Spice level is mild 0-500 Scoville Units.\u003cbr\u003e\n   \u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Banana Pepperoncini, Guero Pepper, Yellow Chili Pepper, Mild Calibre Pepper, Yellow Wax Pepper, Sweet Banana Pepper, Hungarian Sweet Pepper, Banana Chile, Yellow Chile Pepper, Sweet Pepper, Hot Banana Pepper.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePepper, Banana\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCapsicum anuum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e14-21\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e80\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual, Perennial 9-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPeppers grows best in warm weather, with ideal temperatures of between 65F-80F during the day and nighttime temperatures of between 60F-70F. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier pepper harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 8-10 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing peppers outdoors, plant peppers in late spring when the soil warms to at least 65F. Fall planting is not typically recommended since they require heat and a long growing season but is possible in climates with mild winters, with consistent 70-80F conditions, or if growing indoors \u0026gt;70F and using supplemental grow lights. If Fall planting, plant at least 12-16 weeks before the first expected frost in Fall.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 18 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 1-2 weeks as plants grow. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBanana peppers are usually harvested when they are 4 to 6 inches long, and have a firm texture, about 60 to 75 days after planting, depending on the variety. You can harvest banana peppers when they are pale yellow (their immature stage) for a milder, tangy flavor, or wait until they ripen to orange or red for a sweeter taste. To harvest, use clean scissors or pruning shears to cut the pepper off the plant, leaving a small portion of the stem attached to avoid damaging the plant. Handle the peppers carefully to prevent bruising, as they are delicate. Regular harvesting encourages the plant to continue producing more peppers throughout the growing season. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":36374455976088,"sku":"HPBAN","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"900+ Count","offer_id":40892240134324,"sku":"HPBAN-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/banana-pepper1_74df696b-c6aa-4854-85bf-9141d67b44c3.jpg?v=1768496660"},{"product_id":"birdhouse-bottle-gourd","title":"Birdhouse Bottle Gourd","description":"Birdhouse Gourd is a charming variety of Lagenaria siceraria gourd that is grown for its hard-shelled fruit, growing up to 9 inches in diameter and 11 inches tall. They either be harvested young to be consumed as a vegetable, or harvested mature to be dried and used to make utensils, drinking gourds, musical instruments, ornamental crafts, birdhouses, kitchen tools, lamps, jewelry, and other useful items. These gourds are considered one of the earliest domesticated plants, dating back as early as 13,000 BC! Watch these impressive light-green gourds dangle on sturdy, long 15-30-foot vines with white flowers then leave them to cure. Once cured, they become hard-shelled and beige, and can be carved, drilled, pyro-engraved, cut, and painted like a wood canvas. Birdhouse Gourd's large, inviting size and distinctive shape attracts various birds, including wrens, chickadees, swallows, and bluebirds! Whether you're an avid crafter or a nature-lover, Birdhouse Gourd offers a unique and rewarding experience.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Bird House Gourd, Large Ornamental Gourd, Buddha Squash, Martinhouse Gourd, Nest Egg Gourd, Canteen Gourd, Decorative Gourd, Hard-Shelled Gourd, Asian Bottle Gourd, Green Gourd, Swan Gourd, Lagenaria Gourd, Calabash Gourd, Bottle Gourd, Crafting Gourd, Ornamental Gourd, Ornamental Pumpkin, White-Flowered Gourd, Long Melon, Birdhouse Gourd, New Guinea Bean, Tasmania Bean.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBottle Gourd, Birdhouse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eLagenaria siceraria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10 - 15 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 10 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 4 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nGourds grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 3-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Birdhouse Gourd outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. Fall planting is not typically recommended but is possible in climates with mild winters (USDA Zones 9-11), or if growing indoors \u0026gt;70F and using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (trellis) or 8 feet (sprawl)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBirdhouse Gourd is ready when the rind is tan and completely dried and hardened. The leaves and stem are withered and faded brown at this stage and gourds can be left outdoors in the winter. To harvest gourds for crafting, leave gourds on the vine to cure after they reach full maturty for at least 1 month. Gourds can dried indoors as well. Cut gourd from the vine, leaving a 1-3-inch stem, and place in a well-ventilated space, turning gourds occasionally as they dry. The indoor drying process may take about 4 months. Gourds are fully dried when they are light in weight and the seeds can be heard rattling inside when the gourd is shaken.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"40+ Count","offer_id":36403766067352,"sku":"BIRD","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"120+ Count","offer_id":52441819283753,"sku":"BIRD-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/bird4.1_4f67f22e-e3a8-414b-8248-33ad953d5d6b.jpg?v=1768407797"},{"product_id":"5-colors-plant-labels","title":"5 Colors Mix T-Shaped Plant Labels","description":"Organize your garden effortlessly with our vibrant Plastic T-Shaped Plant Labels in 5 fun colors! Each pack contains 10 durable, waterproof labels made from high-quality plastic, ensuring they withstand the elements and last throughout the growing season. Available in a variety of colors - red, blue, yellow, green, and pink - these labels not only help you keep track of your plants but also add a splash of color to your garden. The T-shaped design provides ample space for writing with any garden marker or pencil, making it easy to identify plant names, dates, and other important information. Ideal for use in flower beds, vegetable patches, and potted plants, these versatile labels are a must-have for every gardener. Keep your garden organized and vibrant with these practical and colorful plant labels!\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nWrite directly on with permanent marker or pen. Can easily clean labels using a household cleaner and reuse. Labels are smudge-proof and rain-proof, made with durable non-toxic plastic.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nFeatures: \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nEnvironmentally Friendly - Pollution-free and easily cleaned with household cleaner to be reused for many years.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nDurable - Thick plastic; long lasting and will not deteriorate, rust, or lose color.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nT-Shaped - Write on directly with permanent marker and easily insert in soil; never bury your writing.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nWater-proof - Writing will stay on through rain and fog.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nVersatile - Use for garden rows, potted flowers and plants, food and charcuterie spreads, themed-parties, school projects, handmade crafts, etc.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nSize: 2.3 inches (6 cm) wide by 4 inches (10 cm) tall\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nMaterial: Plastic, Polyvinyl Chloride\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n10 Labels Pack:\u003cbr\u003e\n2 Pink, 2 Yellow, 2 Blue, 2 Red, 2 Green\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n20 Labels Pack:\u003cbr\u003e\n4 Pink, 4 Yellow, 4 Blue, 4 Red, 4 Green\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n50 Labels Pack:\u003cbr\u003e\n10 Pink, 10 Yellow, 10 Blue, 10 Red, 10 Green\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Plant Markers, Row Markers, Food Labels, T-Shaped Labels, Garden Tags, Seed Labels, Garden Labels, Nursery Tags, Plant Identification, Plant Tags, Grow Labels, Botanical Markers, Horticultural Markers.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePlant Labels, Multi-Color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1-13\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"10+ Count","offer_id":36404244250776,"sku":"LBMULTI","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count","offer_id":50130693947689,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x","price":8.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count","offer_id":52476897919273,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x","price":10.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 Blue T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476897952041,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBBLUE","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 Blue T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476897984809,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBBLUE-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 Blue T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898017577,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBBLUE-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 Green T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898050345,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBGREEN","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 Green T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898083113,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBGREEN-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 Green T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898115881,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBGREEN-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 Pink T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898148649,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBPINK","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 Pink T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898181417,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBPINK-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 Pink T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898214185,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBPINK-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 Purple T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898246953,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBPURP","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 Purple T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898279721,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBPURP-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 Purple T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898312489,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBPURP-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 Red T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898345257,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBRED","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 Red T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898378025,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBRED-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 Red T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898410793,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBRED-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 Yellow T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898443561,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBYELLOW","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 Yellow T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898476329,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBYELLOW-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 Yellow T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898509097,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBYELLOW-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10+ Count \u0026 10 White T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898541865,"sku":"LBMULTI+LBWHITE","price":4.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30 White T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898574633,"sku":"LBMULTI-3x+LBWHITE-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"60+ Count \u0026 60 White T-Shaped Labels","offer_id":52476898607401,"sku":"LBMULTI-6x+LBWHITE-6x","price":16.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/LBMULTI1_d16184c7-4f80-4595-b663-1001dfbafd9b.png?v=1769022369"},{"product_id":"green-stem-shanghai-bok-choy","title":"Lu Xiu Green Stem Shanghai Bok Choy","description":"Lu Xiu Green Stem Shanghai Bok Choy boasts wide, jade-colored stalks shaped like soup spoons with tender leaves and a mild, sweet, celery-like flavor. Shanghai Bok choy is an is a staple in Asian cooking. Crisp and refreshing, boy choy brings a vibrant crunch and subtle sweetness that is delicious. Green Stem Shanghai is both attractive and delicious sauteed in noodles and stir-fries, soups, chopped salads, and braised dishes. Highly nutritious, bok choy is rich in vitamins A, C, and K, as well as essential minerals like calcium and potassium and is a nourishing addition to any balanced diet.   \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Pak Choi, Pok Choi, Pak Choy, Bok Choy, Chinese Cabbage, White Cabbage, Shanghai Cabbage, Cantonese Cabbage, Dwarf Cabbage, White-Stem Cabbage, Spoon Cabbage, Baby Napa Cabbage, Chinese Chard, Petsai.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBok Choy, Lu Xiu\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrassica rapa subsp. chinensis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e40\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting bok choy in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (bok choy grows best in 50F-70F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-3 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 6 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 50F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 6-8 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBok Choy can be harvested at maturity, typically about 45–60 days after planting, though bok choy can be harvested at any stage of maturity. Harvest baby bok choy when the heads are about 4–6 inches tall or wait until they reach full size, usually around 10–12 inches tall. The leaves should be crisp and tender, and the stalks should be firm. Harvest by cutting the plant at the base with a sharp knife or scissors, just above the soil line. For continuous harvesting, you can also remove outer leaves and let the inner ones continue to grow. Avoid waiting too long, as bok choy can bolt (go to seed) in warm weather, which affects flavor and texture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"2000+ Count","offer_id":36425987326104,"sku":"BOKCS","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":52441342345513,"sku":"BOKCS-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Baby White Stem Bok Choy","offer_id":52441342378281,"sku":"BOKCS+BOKCD","price":5.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/bokcg10_d6d67c9b-38fb-42a8-9d2c-2f7b7628eabd.jpg?v=1768404042"},{"product_id":"calabrese-broccoli","title":"Green Sprouting Calabrese Broccoli","description":"Calabrese Broccoli is a garden standard is named after it's origins in Calabria, Italy. This highly sought-after variety is known for its large, flavorful heads and tender stalks. Once the main head is harvested, this robust broccoli produces an abundance of edible side shoots, providing producing a second crop. The rich, earthy flavor of Calabrese makes it a versatile addition to a wide range of dishes, from stir-fries to soups and casseroles. It is also a cold-tolerant plant, thriving in cooler temperatures, which makes it perfect for early spring or fall gardening. Calabrese Broccoli can also be planted in succession for a continual harvest from summer into autumn. With its fast-growing nature, Calabrese Broccoli offers a quick and rewarding harvest, making it ideal for both beginner and experienced gardeners.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Italian Broccoli, Broccolo Calabrese, Calabrese Green Broccoli, Sprouting Broccoli, Green Sprouting Broccoli, Calabrese Cabbage, Early Sprouting Broccoli, Romanesco Broccoli, Winter Broccoli, Broccoli Raab, Brassica Oleracea.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBroccoli, Green Sprouting Calabrese\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrassica oleracea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e80\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting broccoli in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (broccoli grows best in 60F-70F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 8 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 55F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 12-14 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 18-24 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, apply again once broccoli begins to form its main head. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBroccoli is ready to harvest when the head is firm, compact, and the individual florets are tightly closed, about 70-100 days after planting. Harvest before the florets start to yellow or open up into flowers for best quality. To harvest, use a sharp knife or garden shears to cut the main head, leaving a few inches of stem attached and at least 6 inches of stem. If the plant is healthy, it may produce smaller side shoots after the main head is harvested, giving you a second crop.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":44483006038313,"sku":"BROCC","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1000+ Count \u0026 1000+ Cauliflower - 2000+ Count","offer_id":52441344180521,"sku":"BROCC+CAULF","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":52441828032809,"sku":"BROCC-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/broccoli1_348b11a8-682a-4073-b331-990e82841ccd.jpg?v=1768407872"},{"product_id":"long-island-brussels-sprout","title":"Long Island Brussels Sprout","description":"Long Island Improved Brussels Sprouts are a must-have for any home gardener looking to grow a delicious, high-yielding crop. These sprouts produce tightly packed, vibrant green buds that have a sweet, nutty flavor when cooked. Made popular in Brussels, Belgium for their sweet, yet bitter, taste and tender, satisfying crunch, they can be chopped or shredded in salads for added crunch, or can be boiled and sauteed or roasted for a rich, caramelized flavor. Brussels sprouts are high in many nutrients, especially fiber, vitamins K and C. Known for their excellent cold tolerance, they thrive in cooler climates, offering a hardy, reliable harvest throughout the fall and into winter. Their compact growth makes them ideal for smaller garden spaces, and their ability to store well means you can enjoy homegrown Brussels sprouts long after the season has ended.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Long Island Improved Brussels Sprouts, Long Island Green Brussels Sprouts, Sprouts, Brussels Cabbage, Mini Cabbages, Brassica Oleracea, Baby Cabbages, Winter Cabbage, Gemmifera, Brussels, Brussels Sprout Cabbage, Petite Cabbages, Little Cabbages.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrussels Sprout, Long Island\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrassica oleracea var. gemmifera\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting brussels sprouts in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (brussels sprouts grows best in 60F-70F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 6-8 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 55F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 12-14 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 18-24 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBrussels sprouts are ready to harvest when the sprouts reach about 1 to 2 inches in diameter, have a firm, tight appearance, and have turned a rich green color. The best time to start picking is after the first frost, as the cold helps to sweeten the flavor of the sprouts. Harvest from the bottom of the stem to the top, removing the mature sprouts. Brussels sprouts mature from the bottom of the plant upwards, so they’ll be ready at different times. Harvesting can continue until the weather becomes too cold for the plants to thrive.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":41963552342196,"sku":"BRUSS","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":52441828426025,"sku":"BRUSS-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/BrusselSprout2_4dd41e2c-2ca5-47fc-be1a-0a2d50d6bb3a.jpg?v=1768407882"},{"product_id":"burgundy-red-okra","title":"Burgundy Red Okra","description":"Burgundy Red Okra is a stunning, vibrant twist on the traditional green variety, featuring deep red pods that add a pop of color and a touch of elegance to your garden. This unique plant boasts tender, crisp pods with a slightly earthy, nutty flavor that is perfect for frying, roasting, or adding to stews and gumbo. Not only does it stand out in the garden, but Burgundy Red Okra also thrives in hot climates, making it a reliable, low-maintenance crop that will bloom attractive cream-colored flowers before producing pods. Plants are highly productive, with Burgundy Red plants yielding abundant harvests of nutrient-packed pods, which are a great source of fiber, vitamins A and C, and antioxidants, promoting overall health and wellness. The plant's tall, robust growth habit makes it an excellent choice for filling garden beds or growing along fences, creating a striking display while also providing a delicious, homegrown food source. Burgundy Red Okra is an exceptional addition to any garden, offering not only visual appeal and culinary versatility but also a nutritious boost to your diet.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Red Okra, Red Burgundy Okra, Purple Okra, Alabama Red Okra, Roselle Okra, Lady Finger, Gumbo, Bhindi, Ochro, Abelmoschus Esculentus, Okra Pods, Quingombó, Yangchao, Bamia.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eOkra, Burgundy Red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAbelmoschus esculentus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e55\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 5 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 4 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nOkra is best planted in warm weather since it thrives in temperatures between 75F-90F. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when soil temperatures are at least 70F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in late spring when the soil warms to at least 50F, or 2-3 weeks after all danger of frost has passed. For fall crops, directly sow outdoors or start indoors then transplant at least 3 months before the first expected frost.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 18 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3-4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest okra when pods are about 3 to 4 inches long and still tender, around 50 to 60 days after planting, or 5-6 days after the flowers fade. It's best to pick the pods when they are young and firm, as older pods can become tough and woody. Use a sharp knife or pruning shears to cut the pods from the plant, leaving a small portion of the stem attached. Be sure to check your okra plants every couple of days, as the pods grow quickly, and harvesting regularly will encourage the plant to produce more.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"200+ Count","offer_id":36465795235992,"sku":"OKRB","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"600+ Count","offer_id":37115472281780,"sku":"OKRB-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"400+ Count","offer_id":52481557856553,"sku":"OKRB+OKRA","price":7.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/redokra81_dbf3b5ac-2005-44cf-8b30-bbc395ff4ed4.jpg?v=1769095598"},{"product_id":"buttercrunch-butterhead-lettuce","title":"Buttercrunch Butterhead Lettuce","description":"Buttercrunch Butterhead Lettuce is a Bibb-type lettuce made an All-American classic for its luscious, \"buttery\" feel and crisp, juicy texture. This garden gem is perfect for those who crave a tender, sweet, and crisp green in their salads. The thick sweet leaves make Buttercrunch lettuce excellent for salads, sandwiches, and wraps. Butterhead Lettuce grows into a large loose-leaved head with a smooth, even green color. The mild, sweet flavor adds a refreshing touch to any meal, and because it’s so tender, it’s especially loved by those who prefer a softer texture compared to other greens. This fast-growing, nutrient-packed leafy green brings both beauty and flavor to your garden. A very good source of fiber, vitamin A, vitamin K, and folate.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Butterhead Lettuce, Butter Lettuce, Butter Crunch, Butter Lettuce Blend, Soft Lettuce, Baby Butter Lettuce, Crisp Butterhead, Looseleaf Butter Lettuce, Smooth Butter Lettuce, Tenderleaf Lettuce.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eLettuce, Buttercrunch Butterhead\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eLactuca sativa var. capitata\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e28-65\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e8 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 8 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting lettuce in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (lettuce grows best in 45F-75F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 3-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 50F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 4-8 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 8 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole or broadcast and separate once seedlings emerge. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. For a continuous harvest, plant successive crops every 2 to 3 weeks.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around the plants helps retain moisture and suppress weeds.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nButtercrunch Butterhead Lettuce can be harvested when the heads are firm and full, about 50-70 days after planting, but before they begin to bolt or develop a bitter taste. You can either cut the entire head at the base using a sharp knife or harvest individual outer leaves as needed, allowing the inner leaves to continue growing for an extended harvest period. If harvesting the whole head, leave the roots in the soil to promote regrowth or plant a new crop for continuous production.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"2000+ Count","offer_id":36466441355416,"sku":"LETBBL","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":40965254611124,"sku":"LETBBL-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Gourmet Mix Lettuce","offer_id":52476903325993,"sku":"LETBBL+LETGM","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Parris Island Romaine Lettuce","offer_id":52476903358761,"sku":"LETBBL+LETROME","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Crisphead Iceberg Lettuce","offer_id":52476903391529,"sku":"LETBBL+LETICE","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/Buttercrunch2_6fae13bf-a76c-4215-aa2d-db8e0bddd57b.jpg?v=1769022415"},{"product_id":"buttercup-squash","title":"Burgess Buttercup Squash","description":"Buttercup Squash is a rich emerald green 6-8 inch-wide winter squash that has rich, orange flesh that is slightly sweeter than butternut squash and has a creamy texture. Buttercup looks very similar to Kabocha squash, its peak season also starts in early fall and lasts through the winter. Delicious roasted, in soups, pies, stews, and curries. It is also rich in vitamins A and C, B vitamins, carotenoids, and minerals.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nSquash is one of the plants grown in the traditional Native American vegetable growing technique called the Three Sisters. The other two plants in the Three Sisters are beans and corn. Each plant had its role in this companion planting tradition. Corn served as a structure for the vining beans to grow up. Squash served as a ground cover to prevent weeds from growing. Beans provided natural fertilizer for all.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Kabocha Squash, Japanese Pumpkin, Winter Squash, Buttercup Pumpkin, Hokkaido Squash, Uchiki Kuri, Red Kabocha, Sweet Pumpkin, Orange Squash, Fall Squash.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eWinter Squash, Buttercup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCurcubita maxima\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4 - 5 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 4 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nButtercup Squash grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Buttercup Squash outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. Fall planting is not typically recommended unless planting in climates with mild winters (USDA Zones 9-11) - plant at least 3-4 months before the first expected frost date - or growing indoors at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (trellis) or 8 feet (sprawl)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nButtercup squash is ready to harvest when the skin has turned a deep, dark green color, often with orange undertones, and is firm to the touch. The stem should be dry and woody, and the vines often begin to wither and die back. It’s best to harvest the squash before the first frost hits, as a light frost can damage the fruit. Use a sharp knife or pruners to cut the squash from the vine, leaving about 2 inches of the stem attached to avoid injury to the squash and help with storage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"40+ Count","offer_id":36467746472088,"sku":"BCUP","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"120+ Count","offer_id":52441808109865,"sku":"BCUP-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/bcup15_d69a09cd-ac7a-4995-8642-d827bcd4c933.jpg?v=1768407728"},{"product_id":"waltham-butternut-squash","title":"Waltham Butternut Squash","description":"Waltham Butternut Squash is a 1970 AAS Winner! This variety has a hard, yellow to tan exterior but delicious sweet, orange flesh inside. Exceptional quality, no stringiness. This long-lasting 6-8-inch-long squash stores all winter.. It has a sweet, nutty taste that is delicious roasted, in soups, pies, stews, and curries. Roast the seeds for snacking! It is also rich in vitamins A and C, B vitamins, and many nutrients such as magnesium and potassium.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nSquash is one of the plants grown in the traditional Native American vegetable growing technique called the Three Sisters. The other two plants in the Three Sisters are beans and corn. Each plant had its role in this companion planting tradition. Corn served as a structure for the vining beans to grow up. Squash served as a ground cover to prevent weeds from growing. Beans provided natural fertilizer for all.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Butternut Squash, Gramma, Butternut Pumpkin.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eWinter Squash, Waltham Butternut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCurcubita moschata\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e110\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4 - 6 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 4 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nButternut Squash grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Butternut Squash outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. Fall planting is not typically recommended unless planting in climates with mild winters (USDA Zones 9-11) - plant at least 3-4 months before the first expected frost date - or growing indoors at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (trellis) or 8 feet (sprawl)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nButternut squash is ready to harvest when the skin turns a deep tan color, feels hard, and resists scratching with a fingernail, typically 80-120 days after planting. The stem should be dry and woody, and the vines often begin to wither and die back. Harvest before the first frost, as frost can damage the squash and reduce its storage life. Use sharp pruners or a knife to cut the squash from the vine, leaving a 1–2 inch stem attached to extend freshness. After harvesting, cure the squash in a warm, dry place for 7-14 days to enhance its sweetness and storage quality.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"60+ Count","offer_id":36708546412696,"sku":"BNUT","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"180+ Count","offer_id":52441822396713,"sku":"BNUT-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/butternut_7ba9019b-a63d-4e6a-a4ae-5d6a4d3d907c.png?v=1768407821"},{"product_id":"golden-acre-cabbage","title":"Golden Acre Cabbage","description":"Golden Acre Green Cabbage is a tasty variety of round-head cabbage that is fast-growing and suitable for close spacing, great for small gardens and large-scale planting. Golden Acre cabbage grows numerous pale green leaves with a slightly waxy finish in an attractive flowering formation. Its tightly packed, round heads boast a crisp texture and a delightfully mild, sweet flavor, making it a favorite for salads, slaws, and stir-fries. Known for its quick growth, this cabbage is ideal for those looking to enjoy a fresh harvest in a short amount of time. Its smaller size makes it easy to handle in the kitchen and an excellent choice for single-serving dishes or smaller households. Additionally, Golden Acre Green Cabbage is highly versatile, thriving in various climates and offering consistent yields, making it a dependable choice for gardeners of all skill levels.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Early Golden Acre, Roundhead Cabbage, Sweetheart Cabbage, Early Green Cabbage, Compact Green Cabbage, Small-Headed Cabbage, Kitchen Garden Cabbage, Tender Green Cabbage, Summer Round Cabbage, Mild Green Cabbage.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCabbage, Golden Acre\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrassica oleracea var. capitata\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e55\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting cabbage in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (cabbage grows best in 60F-70F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 55F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 12-14 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 18-24 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest cabbage when the heads are firm, fully formed, and have reached the desired size, typically 60-100 days after planting or 45-60 days after transplanting. To check if a head is ready, gently squeeze it; if it feels solid, it’s time to harvest. Use a sharp knife to cut the cabbage at its base, leaving a few outer leaves attached to protect the head. For extended harvesting, remove only the mature heads and leave the outer leaves and stem in place to encourage smaller secondary heads to form.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":41963552243892,"sku":"CABGA","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":41963552276660,"sku":"CABGA-3x","price":6.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1000+ Count \u0026 1000+ Red Acre Cabbage","offer_id":52448140132649,"sku":"CABGA+CABRA","price":5.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/greencabbage3_f903a89c-e171-4600-8498-6e05563d5b3c.jpg?v=1768495814"},{"product_id":"california-giant-zinnia","title":"California Giants Mix Zinnia","description":"California Giants Mix Zinnia is a stunning collection of vibrant, large multi-petaled 6-inch-wide blooms that bring a bold splash of color to your garden. With plants reaching up to 3 feet tall, these zinnias create a dramatic display of flowers in colors of red, pink, orange, purple, lavender, white, and yellow. California Giants Mix Zinnias are perfect for bouquets because their large, vibrant blooms and sturdy stems make them both eye-catching and long-lasting. Their wide variety of bright colors and easy-to-arrange structure adds cheerful beauty and texture to any floral arrangement. California Giants Mix plants thrive in full sun, making them perfect for brightening up any garden bed, border, or even containers. These zinnias are not only visually captivating but also attract pollinators like butterflies and bees, adding to your garden's natural charm. California Giants Mix Zinnias bloom profusely from summer through fall, offering months of color. Easy to grow and low-maintenance, California Giants Mix Zinnia ensures a vibrant, show-stopping garden with minimal effort.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: California Giants Zinnia Mix, California Zinnia, Zinnia California Giants, Zinnia California Mix, Zinnia Giant Mix, Zinnia Color Mix, Giant Zinnia Blend, Zinnia Extra Large Mix, Zinnia California Colors, Zinnia Jumbo Mix.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eZinnia, California Giants Mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eZinnia elegans\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e70\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4 - 5 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual, Perennial 9-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nZinnia thrives in hot weather, preferring growing temperatures of 70F-85F. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor earlier blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 65F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 70F or night temperatures are consistently above 50F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil reaches at least 70F or when night temperatures are consistently above 50F. Fall planting is not recommended unless planting outdoors in environments with mild, frost-free winters, or planting indoors with supplemental grow lights. If fall planting, plant in containers to prepare to store plants indoors over winter.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 10 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole, then cover thinly with soil. In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered and gently watered in. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 10 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding. Water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nZinnia are low-maintenance plants once established and require minimal care. During the growing season, water regularly, providing about an inch per week, but avoid overhead watering to minimize the risk of powdery mildew. Applying a layer of mulch around the plants helps retain soil moisture and suppress weeds. To encourage continuous blooming, deadhead spent flowers by pinching or cutting them just above a set of leaves. For bushier plants, pinch back the stems when they are young. If growing tall varieties, staking may be necessary to prevent them from bending or breaking. Fertilizing lightly every few weeks with a balanced flower fertilizer can promote healthier growth and vibrant blooms. With care, zinnias will bloom profusely from late spring until the first frost, providing a colorful and pollinator-friendly display for many months.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":41963552145588,"sku":"ZINCG","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":41963552178356,"sku":"ZINCG-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":52566738272553,"sku":"ZINCG-6x","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Ounce","offer_id":52566738305321,"sku":"ZINCG-1OZ","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2 Ounces ~ 7200+ Count","offer_id":52566738338089,"sku":"ZINCG-2OZ","price":12.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52566738370857,"sku":"ZINCG-1\/4LB","price":18.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52566738403625,"sku":"ZINCG-1\/2LB","price":32.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound Bulk","offer_id":52566738436393,"sku":"ZINCG-1LB","price":45.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 Pounds Bulk","offer_id":52566738469161,"sku":"ZINCG-3LB","price":106.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cgzin1_d1899a2d-da89-4e9f-8ef0-1f052c85c4be.jpg?v=1770225593"},{"product_id":"scarlet-nantes-carrot","title":"Scarlet Nantes Carrot","description":"Scarlet Nantes Carrot features near perfect cylindrical root with smooth skin and entirely edible near-red flesh. This sweet and mild-flavored variety, sized 6-9-inches long, was developed in the 1850's, named after the largest city in Brittany, France. Scarlet Nantes is the improved, even sweeter, crispier variety of the Nantes carrot. Use Scarlet Nantes in delicious glazed or roasted carrot dishes, in carrot cakes, pureed for soups, or cut fresh for snacking, crudites, salads and slaws. Carrots are a rich source of beta carotene, fiber, vitamin A, potassium, and antioxidants.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Heirloom Carrots, Sweet Carrots, Orange Carrots, Red Carrots, Nantes Carrots, Parisian French Carrots.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCarrot, Scarlet Nantes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eDaucus carota\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e14-28\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e70\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4 - 6 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRoot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nCarrots grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage. If planting in a garden bed, carrots can be planted more densely, at a rate of 16 plants per square foot.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant carrots in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked and the soil reaches about 45F (carrot germination is 55F-80F). For fall crops, direct sow seeds 10-12 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 2 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Carrots can also be double-planted (planted in pairs) down the rows. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCarrots are ready to harvest when they have reached a desirable size, around 2-3 months after growing. To determine if they are ready, gently pull one from the soil to check its size, and look for the top of the root to be a vibrant color. If the root is firm and the desired size, it’s time to harvest. You can wash and taste-test carrots to determine if they are sweet, crisp, and flavorful to help determine when to harvest. Carrots can be harvested when they reach a mature size, usually 6-8 inches in length, or when they reach 3-4 inches for baby snacking carrots. Though, carrots can be left to grow larger if desired. Harvest carrots by pulling from the tops until the roots separate from the soil. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"5000+ Count","offer_id":41963552080052,"sku":"CARRSN","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"15000+ Count","offer_id":52448146096425,"sku":"CARRSN-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound","offer_id":52448146129193,"sku":"CARRSN-1\/2LB","price":19.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound","offer_id":52448146161961,"sku":"CARRSN-1LB","price":28.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/carrots_3f215f8e-6e5b-40dc-a8a0-c817bc696f1e.jpg?v=1768495909"},{"product_id":"snowball-cauliflower","title":"Snowball Y Cauliflower","description":"Snowball Y Cauliflower is a stunning, compact variety that produces pure white, dense heads surrounded by lush green leaves. This heirloom cauliflower is not only visually appealing but also incredibly versatile in the kitchen, making it a must-have for any vegetable garden. Its creamy texture and mild, nutty flavor make it a favorite for roasting, steaming, or blending into soups and sauces. Gardeners will appreciate its excellent heat tolerance and uniform growth, ensuring consistent harvests throughout the season. This variety is also known for its high nutritional value, being rich in vitamins C and K, antioxidants, and dietary fiber. Growing Snowball Y Cauliflower is a rewarding experience, as it thrives in a range of climates and can be stored for extended periods. Tasty and versatile, Snowball cauliflower can be used raw in salads, roasted, boiled, steamed, or pickled.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Snowball White, Snowball Early, White Snowball, Arctic White, Crystal Cauliflower, Early Snowball, Snow Crown, White Globe, Snowflake Cauliflower, Frosty White.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCauliflower, Snowball\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrassica oleracea var. botrytis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e65\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 30 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 -24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2025\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCauliflower grows best in cool temperatures (60F-70F). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location 1-2 weeks before the last average frost date in Spring. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 60F. For fall crops, start indoors in late summer or direct sow seeds outdoors 6-8 weeks before the first frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 18-24 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a high-nitrogen fertilizer to support leaf growth, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, apply again, this time using a low-nitrogen fertilizer once cauliflower begins to form its head. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCauliflower is ready to harvest when the heads (curds) are compact, firm, and have reached between 6-8 inches in diameter. Harvest before the curds begin to separate or discolor, as this indicates overripeness. To harvest, use a sharp knife to cut the head off at the base, leaving a few outer leaves attached for protection.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":44483005448489,"sku":"CAULF","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":44483005481257,"sku":"CAULF-3x","price":6.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cauliflower_ac20785d-32d5-4e4f-b383-a6d465394703.jpg?v=1743180047"},{"product_id":"tall-utah-52-70r-improved-celery","title":"Tall Utah 52-70R Improved Celery","description":"Tall Utah 52-70R Improved is a popular variety of celery for its tall, thick-stemmed shape, vibrant color, and production reliability. Celery originated as a marsh plant in the Mediterranean and prefers cooler climates and moist, nutritious soil. Celery is also a cut-and-come again crop, simply harvest the outer stalks and the plant will reproduce again with a lifespan of 2 years. Its fibrous stalks can be juiced or used in salads, soups, stews, and as a snack with dips for many essential digestive and cardiovascular health benefits. Its mild flavor and crunch make it a versatile ingredient in Western cooking. Utah Tall celery also contains high amounts of vitamin C, beta carotene, and flavonoids.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Improved Tall Utah Celery, Tall Utah 52-70R Celery, Utah Green Celery, Heirloom Celery, Stalk Celery, Herb Celery, Ajwain, Pascal Celery, Cutting Celery, Apium Graveolens, Garden Celery, Stalk Celery, Wild Celery.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCelery, Tall Utah 52-70R Improved\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eApium graveolens\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e14-21\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e105\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBiennial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Celery can also be planted in a grid formation to better shade celery plants and promote blanching.\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCelery grows best in cool temperatures, with an ideal growing range between 55-75F. Temperature above 80F can cause celery to bolt. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 8-10 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 50F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 10-12 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 8 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a light dressing of fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest Celery stalks as needed by removing outer stalks when they are 12\" or more in length, or harvest whole plants when 3\" or more in diameter, about 85-120 days after planting. To harvest, cut the entire plant at the base just above the soil line, or you can cut individual stalks as needed, starting from the outermost ones. For the best flavor, it's recommended to harvest before the plant starts flowering, as this can cause the stalks to become bitter and tough. If you're growing celery as a perennial, you can also harvest in stages over time, allowing the inner stalks to continue developing.  \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1500+ Count","offer_id":36770172698776,"sku":"CEL","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4500+ Count","offer_id":40969364897972,"sku":"CEL-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1500+ Count \u0026 1500+ Giant Prague Celeriac","offer_id":52448147964201,"sku":"CEL+CELGP","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1500+ Count \u0026 1500+ Summer 38 Celtuce","offer_id":52448147996969,"sku":"CEL+CELTS38","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1500+ Count \u0026 1500+ Yellow Stem Chinese Celery","offer_id":52448148029737,"sku":"CEL+CCELY","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/celery1_eb5df290-fd76-4782-8ff7-5a9e8cf9ee84.jpg?v=1768495916"},{"product_id":"cherry-belle-radish","title":"Cherry Belle Radish","description":"Cherry Belle Radish is a beautiful cherry red variety with crisp white centers and near perfect globe shape. This 1-2-inch radish offers a delightful mild peppery flavor and refreshing crunch that’s perfect for fresh salads, sandwiches, or snacking straight from the garden. With a fast-growing nature, it matures in just 25 days, providing an almost immediate reward for gardeners eager to enjoy their harvest. These radishes thrive in cool weather and are incredibly easy to grow, making them ideal for both beginner and seasoned gardeners. Cherry Belle plants are compact and versatile, fitting perfectly in smaller garden beds, containers, or raised beds. Loved for their disease resistance and low-maintenance growth, Cherry Belle Radishes deliver a high yield with minimal effort. Whether you’re seeking a quick-growing vegetable to add to your meals or looking to brighten up your garden with vibrant color, Cherry Belle Radish offers a perfect balance of beauty, flavor, and convenience.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Raphanus Sativus, Radis Cerise, Radish Cherry Belle, Radis Ronde, Cherry Red Radish, Rábano Rojo, Mini Red Radish, Raphanus Red, Radis De Jardin, Rábano De Verano.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRadish, Cherry Belle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRaphanus sativus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e25-30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 9 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRoot, Rosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e If planting in a garden bed, radish can be planted more densely, at a rate of 16 plants per square foot.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant radish in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked and the soil reaches about 45F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds 8-10 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 2 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Radishes can also be double-planted (planted in pairs) down the rows. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. You may make several plantings 8-10 days apart for a steady supply of radishes. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nRadishes are ready to be harvested when they reach their mature size, typically 3 to 4 weeks. To check for readiness, gently pull back the soil around the top of the root to see its size. Radishes left in the ground too long can become woody, pithy, or overly spicy. Harvest by firmly grasping the greens near the base and pulling them straight out of the soil. After harvesting, trim the greens to about 1 inch above the root, wash off any soil, and store them in the refrigerator. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1200+ Count","offer_id":49231376744745,"sku":"RADCB","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3600+ Count","offer_id":40916356694196,"sku":"RADCB-3x","price":10.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7200+ Count","offer_id":52513912848681,"sku":"RADCB-6x","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1200+ Count \u0026 1200+ Crayon Colors Mix Radish","offer_id":52513912881449,"sku":"RADCB+RADCC","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cherryradish2_915c6d08-f176-4860-8c92-5255fb2a4417.jpg?v=1769529794"},{"product_id":"purple-shine-chinese-eggplant","title":"Purple Shine Chinese Eggplant","description":"Purple Shine F1 Chinese Eggplant is a hybrid variety of long purple eggplant that has a glossy vibrant purple sheen, thinner skin, and fewer seeds compared to other varieties, making it ideal for stir-fry cooking. It is widely popular in Szechuan cuisine as its mild flavor pairs well with strong flavors and spices. With its mild, sweet flavor and creamy texture, it is a delicious addition to a variety of dishes, from stir-fries to grills. Purple Shine is an easy-to-grow variety that is thrives in warm environments and is high-yielding, offering excellent productivity throughout the growing season. Chinese Eggplant also makes an excellent supplement to vegetarian and vegan diets. It boasts a variety of health benefits, including high amounts of dietary fiber, potassium, and B vitamins. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Aubergine, Brinjal, Melanzana, Melongene, Guinea Squash, Chinese Eggplant, Japanese Eggplant, Long Purple Eggplant, Asian Eggplant, Chinese Long Eggplant, Purple Chinese Aubergine.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eEggplant, Purple Shine F1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSolanum melongena, Solanum ovigerum, Solanum trongum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e78\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHybrid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nEggplant grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier eggplant harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 8-10 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIf needed, support with stakes or cages if heavy eggplants weigh plants down as they establish.\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing eggplants outdoors, plant in late spring when the soil warms to at least 65F. Fall planting is not typically recommended but is possible in climates with mild winters, with consistent 70-80F conditions, or if growing indoors \u0026gt;70F and using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e If needed, support with stakes or cages if heavy eggplants weigh plants down as they establish.\n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and 2 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3-4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 1-2 weeks as plants grow. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest eggplants when they are glossy, firm, and have reached their mature size, typically 60-80 days after transplanting. Gently press the skin-if it springs back, it’s ripe; if the indentation stays, it’s overripe. Use sharp pruning shears or a knife to cut the fruit, leaving about 1 inch of the stem attached, and avoid pulling to prevent damaging the plant.\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"200+ Count","offer_id":36842555211928,"sku":"CHEG","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"600+ Count","offer_id":40861650419892,"sku":"CHEG-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"200+ Count \u0026 200+ Small Indian Eggplant","offer_id":52448156025129,"sku":"CHEG+EGPIN","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"200+ Count \u0026 200+ Petch Siam Thai Green Eggplant","offer_id":52448156057897,"sku":"CHEG+EGPPS","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"200+ Count \u0026 1000+ Black Beauty Eggplant","offer_id":52448156090665,"sku":"CHEG+EGPBB","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"200+ Count \u0026 1000+ Long Purple Eggplant","offer_id":52448156123433,"sku":"CHEG+EGPLP","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/chineseeggplant4.2_f1eed205-51b4-488c-9e77-a4e2d1edaa46.jpg?v=1768495951"},{"product_id":"onion-chives","title":"Onion Chives","description":"Onion Chives, a delightful herb featuring elegant slender, hollow leaves with a fresh and mild onion flavor that are perfect for garnishing and adding flavor to meals. Their versatility in the kitchen makes them an essential herb for any home cook, whether used in salads, soups, or as a topping for baked potatoes. They are also delicious herbs to add in scrambled eggs, eggs benedicts, quiches, and also to dried to use as seasoning. Onion Chives grow edible purple chive blossoms and will regrow after cutting for decades. They are easy to grow in both garden beds and containers, making them ideal for urban gardeners with limited space. Onion Chives can also be used for an attractive perennial border or edging for flower beds and herb gardens. These hardy plants thrive in full sun, tolerating a wide range of soil types, and they can be harvested multiple times throughout the growing season. Their crisp texture and unique taste are sure to elevate your culinary creations while providing a healthy dose of vitamins A and C.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Chive, Scallion Chives, Allium Schoenoprasum, Common Chives, Garden Chives, Wild Chives, Chive Greens, Onion Greens, Chinese Chives, Leek Chives.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eChives, Onion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAllium schoenoprasum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e80\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e8 -12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 -12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eClumping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePerennial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nChives grows best in cool weather, thriving in 60F-70F soil temperatures. Plant Chives in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked, about 2-4 weeks before the last frost in spring. Optionally, start Chives indoors 8 weeks before the last frost in Spring. Harden off, then divide clumps 6 inches apart outdoors when the soil reaches 55F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors at least 4 weeks before the first frost. Established Chives can be mulched and overwintered. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 5 seeds per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Or, broadcast seeds and separate clumps to the desired spacing when seedlings come up. If you want a continuous supply throughout the fall, you can sow seeds every 2-3 weeks.\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig to deeply to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once plants are established, you may optionally apply a light or diluted dressing of a complete fertilizer once a month during the growing season, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nOnion Chives are best harvested when leaves are 8-10 inches long, and the plants are established, around 60-90 days after planting. Use sharp scissors or a knife to cut the leaves about 1-2 inches above the base, leaving the plant's base intact to allow for regrowth. You can harvest the leaves repeatedly throughout the growing season, typically every 3-4 weeks, as garlic chives are fast-growing and will continue to produce new leaves. If harvesting the flower buds, do so just before they fully open, as they are tender and flavorful at this stage. Avoid harvesting more than one-third of the plant at a time to ensure continued growth and vigor. Regular harvesting encourages bushier growth and prevents the plant from becoming overly woody or tough.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":36842819518616,"sku":"CHIVO","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":41019895447732,"sku":"CHIVO-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1000+ Count \u0026 1500+ Tokyo Bunching Green Onion\/Scallion","offer_id":52448157466921,"sku":"CHIVO+SCAL","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1000+ Count \u0026 1000+ Garlic Chives","offer_id":52448157499689,"sku":"CHIVO+CHIVG","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/chives27_25d0fe3f-b3ce-4f43-992b-27dd18edbaa7.jpg?v=1768495962"},{"product_id":"cilantro","title":"Leisure Cilantro","description":"Leisure Cilantro is a vibrant, herbaceous plant known for its fresh, aromatic leaves and flavorful seeds. Leisure is high yielding, has uniform growth habit, is heat tolerant and slow to bolt, ready for harvest in 28-40 days. Its light, feathery green foliage is perfect for enhancing any herb garden or container planting. This cilantro variety is prized for its ability to thrive in cooler weather, making it an ideal choice for early spring or fall harvests. Offering a balance of spice and citrusy undertones, Leisure Cilantro is perfect for a variety of culinary uses, from fresh salsas and guacamole to soups, curries, and salads. Its fast-growing nature means you'll have fresh, flavorful leaves to add to your meals in no time. As a versatile herb, Leisure Cilantro can also be used as a natural pest repellent in the garden, keeping unwanted insects at bay. It’s a must-have for any garden or kitchen.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Coriander, Fresh Cilantro, Chinese Parsley, Mexican Parsley, Dhaniya, Koriander, Cilantro Leaf, Green Cilantro, Garden Cilantro, Culinary Cilantro.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCilantro, Leisure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCoriandrum sativum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e55\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCilantro grows best in cool weather. Plant Cilantro in the spring when the soil temperature is at least 55F, about 2-4 weeks after the last frost in spring. Transplanting Cilantro is not recommended as plants can bolt easily. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 6-8 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. If you want a continuous supply of cilantro throughout the fall, you can sow seeds every 2-3 weeks.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig to deeply to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Cilantro does not require frequent fertilization. If leaves are smaller than expected, you may optionally apply a light dressing of a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest cilantro when the leaves are young and tender, usually around 3-4 weeks after planting, when the plant reaches about 4-6 inches tall. To harvest, use sharp scissors or shears to snip the outer leaves, leaving the inner ones to continue growing. It's best to harvest in the morning for the best flavor. Pick the leaves regularly to encourage new growth and delay bolting (flowering and going to seed), which makes the leaves more bitter. Avoid harvesting too much at once—take no more than one-third of the plant at a time. Once the plant starts to flower, you can let it go to seed for coriander or stop harvesting the leaves.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":36853811609752,"sku":"CTRO","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":41020098805940,"sku":"CTRO-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cilantro19_2922fa5a-6e2c-49bc-a2b3-aefe083309f8.jpg?v=1768496185"},{"product_id":"collard-greens","title":"Georgia Southern Collard Greens","description":"Georgia Southern Collards are a classic Southern favorite known for their rich flavor and high yields. This heirloom variety boasts large, dark green leaves that are tender yet hearty, making it a perfect addition to any garden. Georgia Southern Collards thrive in both warm and cool seasons, offering versatility and an extended harvest period. The tender leaves are packed with nutrients, including vitamins A, C, and K, as well as fiber, making them a great addition to any healthy meal. They are also known for their resilience, as they can tolerate a variety of soil types and grow in less-than-ideal conditions, making them an excellent choice for both novice and experienced gardeners. Whether braised, sauteed, steamed, or added to soups and stews, Georgia Southern Collards provide a hearty taste that will touch the soul.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Collard Greens, Tree Cabbage, Southerner Cabbage, Wild Cabbage, Green Cabbage, Brassica Oleracea, Collards Kale, Cabbage Collard, Flat Leaf Cabbage, American Cabbage.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCollards, Georgia Southern\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBrassica oleracea var. viridis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e70\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 36 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nStart indoors 3-4 weeks before the last frost in spring, or plant Collards in the spring after all danger of frost has passed and the soil begins to warm (\u0026gt;45F). For fall crops, direct sow seeds or transplant seedlings outdoors 6-8 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 12-18 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCollard Greens are ready to harvest once the lower leaves are 8-10 inches long, 60 to 85 days after planting. To harvest, use sharp scissors or garden shears to cut the outer leaves at the base, leaving the inner leaves to continue growing. If you want to harvest the entire plant, wait until the leaves are mature and the plant has formed a large, thick head. Collard greens can tolerate light frosts, which can help improve their flavor.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"2000+ Count","offer_id":41963551948980,"sku":"COLL","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":41963551981748,"sku":"COLL-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 3000+ Florida Broadleaf Mustard","offer_id":52448158220585,"sku":"COLL+MUSTFB","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Scotch Curled Kale","offer_id":52448158253353,"sku":"COLL+KALE","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/collards6_860b567e-267a-4d25-9369-6f1d0fe805a9.jpg?v=1768495979"},{"product_id":"connecticut-field-pumpkin","title":"Connecticut Field Pumpkin","description":"Connecticut Field Pumpkin is an old-fashioned heirloom variety that is considered the classic \"pumpkin patch pumpkin\" for picking and carving! One of the oldest pumpkins in existence widely used for Jack O' Lanterns and attractive autumn decorations for farm stands, front porches, and windows. The plants grow vigorously, producing large, robust pumpkins that are not only visually striking but also highly versatile. Known for their rich, sweet flavor, Connecticut Field Pumpkins are ideal for baking pies, making soups, or adding a flavorful twist to your favorite autumn recipes. Their thick, sturdy flesh also makes them perfect for long-lasting storage, so you can enjoy their beauty and flavor throughout the season. Whether you're looking to grow pumpkins for carving, cooking, or simply to add some seasonal charm to your garden, Connecticut Field Pumpkins offer the perfect combination of tradition, flavor, and beauty.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nSquash is one of the plants grown in the traditional Native American vegetable growing technique called the Three Sisters. The other two plants in the Three Sisters are beans and corn. Each plant had its role in this companion planting tradition. Corn served as a structure for the vining beans to grow up. Squash served as a ground cover to prevent weeds from growing. Beans provided natural fertilizer for all.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Standard Pumpkin, Classic Pumpkin, Jack o' Lantern Pumpkin, Yankee Field Pumpkin, New England Pumpkin, Old-Time Field Pumpkin, American Field Pumpkin, Traditional Halloween Pumpkin, Heritage Field Pumpkin, Connecticut Orange Pumpkin, Heirloom Field Pumpkin. Carving Pumpkin.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePumpkin, Connecticut Field\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCurcubita pepo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e100\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 36 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10 - 15 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 8 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPumpkins grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 65F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is reliably above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish, spacing plants 3 feet apart at the base, and prepare additional support for the heavy pumpkins as they grow.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Pumpkins outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 60F. Fall planting is not typically recommended unless planting in climates with mild winters (USDA Zones 9-11) - plant at least 3-4 months before the first expected frost date - or growing indoors at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish and prepare additional support for the heavy squash as they grow.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (trellis) or 8 feet (sprawl)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest Connecticut Field pumpkins when they reach their full size, typically 12-20 inches in diameter, and their skin turns a deep, solid orange with a hard, tough rind. This usually occurs around 100-120 days after planting, in early to mid-fall. To check for ripeness, press your fingernail against the skin—if it resists puncture, the pumpkin is ready. Use sharp pruners or a knife to cut the stem 3-4 inches above the pumpkin, as a longer stem helps prevent rot. Avoid carrying pumpkins by the stem, as it can break and shorten storage life. Let them cure in the sun for 10-14 days to harden the skin, then store in a cool, dry place. Harvest before the first frost to prevent damage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"200+ Count","offer_id":36853921874072,"sku":"PUMPCF","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"600+ Count","offer_id":40948750745780,"sku":"PUMPCF-3x","price":13.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"50+ Count","offer_id":52486764003625,"sku":"PUMPCF_50","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/pumpkin11_de162737-5336-47e7-ac6c-5e9917e72a24.jpg?v=1769171657"},{"product_id":"cracker-jack-mix-marigold","title":"Cracker Jack Mix African Marigold","description":"Cracker Jack Mix African Marigolds are half-hardy annuals that feature 3-4-inch blooms in bright shades of orange, gold, and yellow! These huge flowers are not affected by deer and have long blooms, lasting from midsummer to first frost. African Marigolds have a history of captivating gardens with their cheerful blooms. In Indian culture, marigolds symbolize purity, auspiciousness, and the divine. African Marigolds grow to 2-3 feet tall on compact, bushy plants. Create enchanting borders around your garden beds or rich displays in beds and containers with these cheerful and vivid blooms!\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Cracker Jack Mix Marigold, African Marigold, Tall Marigold, Orange and Yellow Mix Marigold, Giant Mix Marigold.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAfrican Marigold, Cracker Jack Mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTagetes erecta\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e50\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 4 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor earlier blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 65F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant after all danger of frost has passed in spring and soil temperatures reach at least 60F. Fall planting is not recommended unless planting outdoors in environments with mild, frost-free winters for a head start in the following spring, or planting indoors with supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/8 inch deep and spaced 12-18 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole, then cover thinly with soil. In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered and gently watered in. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 12-18 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding. Water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nMarigolds are low-maintenance flowers and benefit from regular watering, allowing the soil to slightly between waterings. Mulching around the base helps retain moisture and suppress weeds. Deadheading spent blooms encourages continuous flowering throughout the season, keeping plants vibrant. Marigolds are relatively pest-resistant. Fertilizing lightly every few weeks with a balanced flower fertilizer promotes healthy growth, but excessive nitrogen can lead to more foliage and fewer blooms. As cooler temperatures approach, marigolds may decline, but their prolific blooming makes them a standout in summer gardens.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":36854035316888,"sku":"MARACJ","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":41022243766452,"sku":"MARACJ-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":52481544225065,"sku":"MARACJ-6x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1000+ Count \u0026 1000+ Sparky Mix French Marigold","offer_id":52481544257833,"sku":"MARACJ+MARFS","price":5.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cjmar6_f732f43c-48d7-4efc-a1c9-e4894bee2822.jpg?v=1769095332"},{"product_id":"crimson-clover","title":"Crimson Clover","description":"Crimson Clover is a striking, fast-growing legume that features deep red flowers, creating a vibrant contrast in any garden or field. Its lush green foliage and vivid blossoms make it an attractive addition to landscapes and gardens. Known for its versatility, Crimson Clover is not only beautiful but also highly beneficial as a cover crop. It enriches the soil by fixing nitrogen, improving soil structure, and providing valuable organic matter. The deep taproot of this clover helps break up compacted soil, improving water retention and drainage. Crimson Clover is also an excellent choice for attracting pollinators like bees and butterflies, creating a wildlife-friendly environment. Additionally, it offers great erosion control, making it perfect for planting on slopes or areas prone to soil degradation. Crimson clover fixes up to 200 pounds of nitrogen per acre, and prefers well-drained, loam soils with good organic matter content for best results. The seeds and flowers are edible; seeds can be sprouted and used in salads or sandwiches, or dried and ground into flour; the flower heads can be used fresh or dried as a tea.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Red Clover, Crimson Trefoil, Scarlet Clover, Purple Clover, Clover Blossom, Cowgrass, Dutch Clover, Trifolium Incarnatum, Italian Clover, and Giant Red Clover.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eClover, Crimson\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTrifolium incarnatum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e80\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e8 - 20 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nPlant Crimson Clover seeds directly outdoors in early spring, as soon as the soil can be worked (soil temperature is least 50F). Transplanting is not recommended. Scatter the seeds over the prepared soil surface and lightly press them 1\/4 inch into the soil or cover seeds thinly with soil. Or broadcast at a rate of 15-20 pounds per acre for larger areas then rake lightly to cover seeds. Gently water after planting. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 6-12 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n \n\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6-12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nOnce established, Crimson Clover are cold-tolerant, hardy, and adaptable. Keep soil moist until established as Crimson Clover can tolerate moderate drought. Since Crimson Clover is nitrogen-fixing, fertilization is usually not needed. Crimson clover can tolerate light frost but may need protection, such as a light mulch, in areas with severe cold. Mow or trim the clover before it sets seed if you intend to use it as a cover crop or to extend its growing season.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":46954226155817,"sku":"CRIMC","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":46954226188585,"sku":"CRIMC-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound","offer_id":49726919377193,"sku":"CRIMC-1LB","price":16.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound","offer_id":50105693765929,"sku":"CRIMC-1\/2LB","price":8.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 Pounds","offer_id":50105693798697,"sku":"CRIMC-3LB","price":19.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/crimc4_efbecf00-b279-4c98-98bb-5647ce632252.png?v=1768496183"},{"product_id":"straight-eight-cucumber","title":"Straight Eight Cucumber","description":"Straight Eight (or Straight 8) Cucumbers are a 1935 All-America Selection winner for reliable production and dual purpose for pickling and raw eating. This classic heirloom variety is prized for its long, straight, and smooth fruits that grow up to eight inches in length. Straight Eight is also known for its crisp texture and refreshing taste, excellent for slicing in salads, sandwiches, or enjoying as a healthy snack. The plants are vigorous and produce a consistent harvest of uniform, dark green cucumbers, making them an attractive choice for gardeners who value both productivity and aesthetics. Straight Eight cucumbers thrive in both traditional gardens and raised beds, adapting well to various growing conditions. The high-quality fruit has a mild flavor with minimal seeds, making it ideal for pickling or fresh consumption. A very vigorous producer, 2 plants can produce over 30 jars of pickles!\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Straight 8 Cucumber, 8-Inch Cucumber, Straight-8, Heirloom Cucumber, Long Green Cucumber, Slicing Cucumber, Garden Cucumber.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCucumber, Straight Eight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCucumis sativus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 8 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 4 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 4 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCucumber grow best in warm weather (75F-85F). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-3 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing cucumbers outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. If Fall planting, sow in early summer, at least 12-14 weeks before the first expected frost date - or if growing indoors, keep at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 2 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish, spacing plants 10 inches apart at the base of the trellis.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n \n*Tip: You can plant fast maturing crops such as lettuce and radishes between cucumber hills to save space. These will be harvested before the cucumber vines get too large.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 feet (sprawl) or 10 inches (trellis)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once plants start to bloom and set fruit, you may optionally apply a fertilizer that is higher in potassium and phosphorus and lower in nitrogen. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest cucumbers when reach the desired size and are green in color. Cucumbers for slicing are best picked when they are 6-8 inches long and 1 inch or more in diameter when mature. Cucumbers grown for pickling are best 3-4 inches long and up to 1 inch in diameter at maturity. Either type can be used for pickling if picked when small. It is best not to wait until cucumbers start yellowing because they will be over-mature and have a strong flavor. To harvest, use a pair of clean scissors or a knife to cut the cucumber from the vine, leaving about an inch of stem attached to avoid damaging the plant.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"100+ Count","offer_id":36854291038360,"sku":"CUKES8","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":40623968125108,"sku":"CUKES8-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16,000+ Count","offer_id":52448174047529,"sku":"CUKES8-1LB","price":35.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/Straight-Eight-Slicing-Cucumber-01_79fb3455-2d8a-4370-9ea9-c0954468b416.gif?v=1768496239"},{"product_id":"curled-cress","title":"Curled Cress","description":"Curled Cress is a fast-growing, cool-season herb related to watercress and mustard, sharing their peppery, tangy flavor and aroma. With its delicate, crisp leaves, this versatile green is perfect for garnishing salads, sandwiches, or soups. Its compact, bushy growth habit makes it ideal for small gardens, windowsills, or containers, allowing gardeners with limited space to easily enjoy fresh herbs. Curled Cress is a hardy plant, thriving in cool temperatures, and can be grown year-round in most climates, making it a reliable addition to any home garden. Its high nutrient content, including vitamin C and antioxidants, adds both flavor and health benefits to your meals. Fast-growing and easy to harvest, Curled Cress provides a quick reward for minimal effort, making it a must-have for those who want fresh, homegrown greens without the wait.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCress, Curled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eLepidium sativum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSpreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCress grows best in cooler temperatures (55F-65F). Plant cress in the spring after all danger of frost has passed as soon as the soil can be worked. For fall crops, direct sow seeds or transplant seedlings outdoors 4-6 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/8 inch deep and spaced 6 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 5 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin plants after germination, broadcast seeds then separate to 6 inches apart after emergence to give plants more spacing for larger growth. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Additional fertilizing is usually not needed because the plant grows so quickly. If growth is slow or leaves are smaller than expected, you may optionally apply a light dressing of a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest Curled Cress when the leaves are young and tender, about 30-40 days after planting. Cut the outer leaves using scissors or garden shears, leaving the younger, inner leaves to continue growing. Harvest the leaves as needed, taking no more than a third of the plant at a time to encourage new growth. It’s best to harvest before the plant bolts (flowers and goes to seed), as this can make the leaves taste more bitter. Regular harvesting will keep the plant productive and ensure a continuous supply of fresh greens.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":36854418997400,"sku":"CRESSC","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":40970174529716,"sku":"CRESSC-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10,000+ Count","offer_id":52448170148137,"sku":"CRESSC-10x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1000+ Count \u0026 1000+ Upland Cress","offer_id":52448170180905,"sku":"CRESSC+CRESSU","price":5.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cress_838542a0-d70f-40d2-972d-ab0a6d622e10.png?v=1768496173"},{"product_id":"daikon-radish","title":"Daikon Radish","description":"Daikon Radish is a popular ingredient in many Asian cuisines. Daikon resembles a large white plump carrot and is commonly eaten raw, cooked, or pickled. These cold-hardy radishes grow 10-16 inches long and are delicious steamed, braised, raw as a snack, and pickled. It grows easily in cooler temperatures and can be harvested in as little as 60 days, making it an ideal crop for those looking to enjoy quick, nutritious produce. Daikon is also highly valued for its health benefits, known for its digestive properties, and it contains essential vitamins and minerals, making it a great addition to a balanced diet. Radish greens also make peppery salad greens or garnish. Also a great source of potassium, vitamin C, and fiber.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Giant White Radish, White Carrot, Japanese Radish, Chinese Radish, Korean Radish, Mu, Mooli, Radish Winter radish, Nitro Radish, Lo Pue, Luobo.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRadish, Daikon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRaphanus sativus var. Longipinnatus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e50\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRoot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e If planting in a garden bed, radish can be planted more densely, at a rate of 16 plants per square foot.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant radish in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked and the soil reaches about 45F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds 8-10 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 4 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Radishes can also be double-planted (planted in pairs) down the rows. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. You may make several plantings 8-10 days apart for a steady supply of radishes. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nDaikon radishes are ready to harvest when the roots reach their mature size, which can range from 6 to 20 inches in length, about 50-70 days after planting. To check readiness, gently brush away some soil around the base of the plant to examine the size of the root. The ideal harvest time is before the first hard frost, as freezing temperatures can damage the roots. Harvesting early ensures a tender, sweet flavor, while delayed harvesting may result in tougher, spicier roots. To harvest, loosen the soil around the root with a garden fork or spade to avoid breakage, then gently pull the daikon out by grasping the base of the leafy tops. After harvesting, remove the greens to prevent them from drawing moisture from the root, and store the daikon in a cool, dark place or the refrigerator for extended freshness. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":36854507077784,"sku":"DAIK","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"900+ Count","offer_id":40932593729716,"sku":"DAIK-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"25,000+ Count","offer_id":52448176832809,"sku":"DAIK-1\/2LB","price":17.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"50,000+ Count","offer_id":52448176865577,"sku":"DAIK-1LB","price":22.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/daikon5.1_8bf2126a-d490-49d6-95fd-be9818e6515b.jpg?v=1768496333"},{"product_id":"delicata-squash","title":"Delicata Squash","description":"Delicata Squash is small, easy-to-cook and is rich, creamy, and very versatile. Delicata gets its name from its uncharacteristically delicate skin for a winter squash. Delicata squash tastes deep, rich, and sweet - remarkably similar to sweet potatoes and is very easy to peel. When roasted until tender the skin is soft and edible like a summer squash. The vines are productive and relatively compact, yielding an abundance of 7- to 9-inch fruits that are just the right size for individual servings. Its thin skin is edible, eliminating the need for peeling, which adds convenience to meal preparation. Delicious roasted, in soups, pies, stews, and curries. It is also rich in vitamins A and C, B vitamins, carotenoids, and minerals.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Sweet Potato Squash, Bohemian Squash, Peanut Squash, Sugar Squash, Sweet Dumpling Squash, Early Delicata, Creamy Delicata, Striped Delicata, Honey Boat Squash, and Zephyr Squash.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eWinter Squash, Delicata\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCurcubita pepo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e95\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4- 6 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining - Dwarf\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nSquash grows best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 4 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant delicata squash in the spring after all danger of frost has passed and the soil begins to warm. If fall planting, plant 8-10 weeks before the average first date in your area. Planting early ensures squash will mature before the first killing frost. To plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 2-3 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, wait until seedlings grow 1-2 sets of leaves before determining the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-6 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants enough to keep them from wilting. If the weather is really dry, water squash plants at least once a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping squash plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeply to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e When blooms first appear, you may optionally apply a dressing of fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest Delicata Squash when the skin is firm and creamy yellow with dark green stripes, and the stem is hard and slightly shriveled, about 80-100 days after planting. To harvest, use a sharp knife or pruners to cut the squash from the vine, leaving about 2-3 inches of stem attached to extend storage life. Harvesting should be done before the first frost, as frost can damage the fruit and reduce its quality. Handle the squash carefully to avoid bruising or breaking the skin, and allow them to cure in a warm, dry place for 7-10 days if you intend to store them for longer periods. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"30+ Count","offer_id":36854982279320,"sku":"DELI","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"90+ Count","offer_id":40954212581556,"sku":"DELI-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/DELI_963eb653-7f7d-487c-891d-2151c876c76d.jpg?v=1768496369"},{"product_id":"mammoth-long-island-dill","title":"Mammoth Long Island Dill","description":"Mammoth Long Island Dill is an easy to grow annual and self-seeding plant with feathery green leaves and seeds that are essential for homemade pickles! This impressive heirloom herb known for its tall, feathery green foliage and aromatic yellow flower heads. Growing up to 4 feet tall, this variety is a showstopper in the garden Its vibrant, tangy flavor brings life to dishes like gravlax (cured salmon) and other fish dishes, borscht, and other soups. salads, soups, roasted vegetables, and dips. The plant’s towering height and delicate texture add stunning visual interest to your garden, and it doubles as a pollinator magnet, attracting beneficial insects like bees and butterflies. Mammoth Long Island Dill is incredibly easy to grow, thriving in most climates and offering continuous harvests throughout the season. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Mammoth Dill, Long Island Mammoth Dill, Garden Dill, Dill Weed, Aneth, Lao Coriander, Ukrop, Shubit, Indian Dill, European Dill, Pickling Dill, Sweet Dill.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eDill, Mammoth Long Island Dill\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnethum graveolens\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 4 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nDill grows best in cooler temperature, between 55F-70F. Plant Dill in the spring when the soil temperature is at least 60F, about 2-4 weeks after the last frost in spring. Transplanting Dill is not recommended as plants have long taproots. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 14 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 12-18 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. If you want a continuous supply of Dill throughout the fall, you can sow seeds every 2-3 weeks.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig to deeply to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Dill does not require frequent fertilization. If plants are smaller than expected, you may optionally apply a light dressing of a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nDill is best harvested when the plant reaches about 6-8 inches in height and has developed a good amount of foliage, about 40-50 days after planting. For the leaves, simply snip off the top 1\/3 of the plant, cutting above a leaf node, which will encourage further growth. If you're harvesting seeds, wait until the flower heads turn brown and dry out, then cut the entire flower stalk and place it in a paper bag to finish drying. Shake the bag to collect the seeds once they're fully dried. Dill grows quickly, so frequent harvesting of the leaves will help encourage continuous growth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"2000+ Count","offer_id":36855210016920,"sku":"DILL","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":41020199895220,"sku":"DILL-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/dill4_aa94359f-ca4d-4cdf-975b-0293f4c0b92a.jpg?v=1768496357"},{"product_id":"black-beauty-eggplant","title":"Black Beauty Eggplant","description":"Black Beauty Eggplant is a popular choice, featuring deep purple, glossy skin that adds a stunning touch to any garden. This easy-to-grow variety has big yields, growing 30\" tall bushes that hold their large, meaty 2-pound fruit off the ground! Beautiful in the garden and in the kitchen, these purple gems are delicious breaded or fried and a as meat substitute in vegetarian or vegan dishes. Black Beauty Eggplant is a versatile ingredient in the kitchen, ideal for making everything from classic ratatouille to flavorful eggplant Parmesan.This eggplant variety is known for its rich, mild flavor and smooth texture, making it ideal for grilling, frying, and roasting. It thrives in warm climates and is a reliable producer, ensuring that home gardeners can enjoy fresh, homegrown produce throughout the growing season. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Black Beauty Aubergine, Black Eggplant, Purple Eggplant, Globe Eggplant, Oval Eggplant, American Eggplant, Italian Eggplant, Eggplant, Solanum Melongena, Purple Beauty, Large Black Beauty.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eEggplant, Black Beauty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSolanum melongena\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10-21\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90-120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nEggplant grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier eggplant harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 8-10 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. If needed, support with stakes or cages if heavy eggplants weigh plants down as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing eggplants outdoors, plant in late spring when the soil warms to at least 65F. Fall planting is not typically recommended but is possible in climates with mild winters, with consistent 70-80F conditions, or if growing indoors \u0026gt;70F and using supplemental grow lights. If needed, support with stakes or cages if heavy eggplants weigh plants down as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and 2 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3-4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 1-2 weeks as plants grow. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHarvest eggplants when they are glossy, firm, and have reached their mature size, typically 60-80 days after transplanting. Gently press the skin-if it springs back, it’s ripe; if the indentation stays, it’s overripe. Use sharp pruning shears or a knife to cut the fruit, leaving about 1 inch of the stem attached, and avoid pulling to prevent damaging the plant.\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":36855552376984,"sku":"BBEGP","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":52441801163049,"sku":"BBEGP-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/eggplant7_f634743d-0149-47a2-80af-9790c6ee0179.jpg?v=1768407697"},{"product_id":"broadleaf-batavian-endive","title":"Broadleaf Batavian Endive","description":"Broadleaf Batavian Endive is characterized by its crisp, broad, and slightly curled leaves. These large, buttery 12-18\" leaves bunch in loose heads and may blanch to cream in the center. It is a flavorful bitter green that can add a great crisp texture and flavor to many types of dishes. Use individual leaves greens as elegant vessels for delightful appetizers or for elegant salads. Add the leaves to soups and stews to enhance the texture and flavor or roast for a warm, earthy size dish. Harvest Broadleaf Batavian Endive baby leaves early on when they reach the desired size, and harvest the full leaves for later use. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Escarole, Butterhead Batavian Endive, Curled Chicory, Lettuce Endive, Curly Endive, Ruffec Leaf Endive, Large Leaf Batavian.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eEndive, Broad-Leaf Batavian\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCichorium endivia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e8 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting endive in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (endive grows best in 60F-70F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 55F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 8-10 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 8 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nEndive is ready at any stage of harvest, but usually harvested when the leaves form a dense rosette, about 50-90 days after planting. To harvest, use a sharp knife to cut the plant at its base, just above the soil line, ensuring you leave the root system intact if you plan to grow another crop. Full heads should be harvested before the plant bolts, which happens in hot weather. For baby greens, you can begin harvesting individual outer leaves when they are 4–6 inches long, allowing the inner leaves to continue growing for successive harvests. If blanching for milder flavor is desired, tie the outer leaves together or cover the plants with a lightweight cloth about a week before harvesting to reduce bitterness.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"1000+ Count","offer_id":46954225697065,"sku":"ENDB","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":46954225729833,"sku":"ENDB-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/endive12_6d4d7957-13cc-4751-b3bd-f16bccced996.jpg?v=1768496407"},{"product_id":"florence-fennel","title":"Florence Fennel","description":"Florence Fennel is a stunning and versatile herb-vegetable hybrid celebrated for its unique anise-like flavor and elegant appearance. This Mediterranean favorite grows with feathery, aromatic green fronds and a crisp, white, bulbous base, making it both a visual and culinary delight. Its delicate flavor complements salads, roasts, and soups, while its tender bulbs are perfect for grilling, braising, or eating raw. Florence Fennel is easy to grow, thriving in a wide range of climates and adding a touch of sophistication to any garden. Fronds can be used as a fresh herb, offering multiple uses from a single plant, while pollinators are drawn to its delicate yellow flowers, boosting the biodiversity of your garden. Its ability to improve digestion and support overall health adds to its appeal, making it as functional as it is flavorful.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Finocchio, Bulb Fennel, Sweet Fennel, Anise Fennel, Italian Fennel, Florence Anise, Garden Fennel, Bronze Fennel, Wild Fennel, and Foeniculum Vulgare.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFennel, Florence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFoeniculum vulgare\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 5 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePerennial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage. If planting in a garden bed, carrots can be planted more densely, at a rate of 16 plants per square foot.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nFennel is best planted in early spring, after the last frost, when the soil has warmed to about 60F. You can direct sow fennel seeds outdoors or start them indoors 6-8 weeks before the last frost date \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest. For fall crops, direct sow seeds 12-16 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 12 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nFennel can be harvested in stages depending on which part you wish to use. To harvest fennel bulbs, wait until they reach a size of about 3-4 inches in diameter, usually around 3-4 months after planting. The bulbs should be firm and white, with a distinct, crisp texture. You can harvest the entire bulb by cutting it at ground level, or for smaller, younger bulbs, you can trim just the outer stalks. If harvesting fennel for its fronds (leaves), you can begin cutting them as soon as they are fully grown and the plant is established, usually within 60-70 days. For fennel seeds, wait until the flowers bloom and the seeds turn brown, which usually happens late in the season, around the time of the first frost. Once the seeds are dry, cut the flowering heads and allow them to dry fully before removing the seeds for storage. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"500+ Count","offer_id":46954225402153,"sku":"FENN","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1500+ Count","offer_id":46954225434921,"sku":"FENN-3x","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/fennel5_fc6c2abb-4da6-4eab-aa90-091c5647a762.jpg?v=1768496446"},{"product_id":"french-breakfast-radish","title":"French Breakfast Radish","description":"French Breakfast Radish is chic and vibrant colored with an ombre of vivid fuchsia-red to bright white at the tip! Topped with edible, leafy greens, French Breakfast radishes are very crisp and offer a mildly spicy flavor. French Breakfast will grow 2-4 inches long and rapidly mature, typically ready to harvest in just 25 to 30 days, allowing gardeners to enjoy fresh, homegrown radishes in no time. The plants thrive in cooler weather and are well-suited for spring and fall gardens, growing easily in both garden beds and containers. French Breakfast Radishes are known for their tender, non-pithy texture, making them a delightful choice for a crisp, refreshing bite. Their disease resistance and low-maintenance growth make them ideal for gardeners of all skill levels, ensuring that anyone can enjoy the satisfying harvest of these vibrant, flavorful radishes. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Raphanus Sativus, Radis Français, Radish French Breakfast, Rábano Desayuno Frances, French Radish, Rábano Rosa, Radis Du Petit Dejeuner, Petit Dejeuner Radish, Raphanus Morning Radish, Radish Breakfast.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRadish, French Breakfast\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRaphanus sativus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e25-30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 9 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRoot, Rosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e If planting in a garden bed, radish can be planted more densely, at a rate of 16 plants per square foot.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant radish in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked and the soil reaches about 45F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds 8-10 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 2 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Radishes can also be double-planted (planted in pairs) down the rows. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. You may make several plantings 8-10 days apart for a steady supply of radishes. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nRadishes are ready to be harvested when they reach their mature size, typically 3 to 4 weeks. To check for readiness, gently pull back the soil around the top of the root to see its size. Radishes left in the ground too long can become woody, pithy, or overly spicy. Harvest by firmly grasping the greens near the base and pulling them straight out of the soil. After harvesting, trim the greens to about 1 inch above the root, wash off any soil, and store them in the refrigerator. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":40916428914868,"sku":"RADFB","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"900+ Count","offer_id":49231376711977,"sku":"RADFB-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10,800+ Count","offer_id":52513915076905,"sku":"RADFB-6x","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/fbrad19.1_21dadfc4-09df-48af-b568-ab40af185325.jpg?v=1769529823"},{"product_id":"catnip","title":"Catnip","description":"Catnip, a hardy perennial herb from the mint family, is known for its fragrant, heart-shaped leaves and clusters of delicate white or lavender flowers. The leaves and stems of the catnip plant contain \"nepetalactone\" oil, which stimulates special receptors in cats and gives them a sense of euphoria or overwhelming happiness, and encouraging playful and relaxed behavior. Beyond its appeal to pets, Catnip is a versatile herb for humans, often used in calming teas and natural remedies to promote relaxation and ease minor stress. Its ability to thrive in a variety of conditions makes it a low-maintenance and rewarding addition to any garden or container. The plant also doubles as a natural repellent, helping to keep mosquitoes and other insects away from your outdoor spaces. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Catmint, Catwort, Field Balm, Catnep, Nepeta, Catswort, Herb Cat, Nip, Garden Catnip, True Catnip.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCatnip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNepeta cataria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10-21\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e85-120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 36 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePerennial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 2 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier catnip harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 6-8 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing catnip outdoors, plant in late spring when the soil warms to at least 60F. For fall crops, start seeding indoors and transplant seedlings outdoors at least 8 weeks before the first expected frost. \n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 18 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-3 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally add fertilizer. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCatnip is ready to harvest when plants are mature, about 3 to 4 months after planting. The best time to harvest is just before the plant starts to flower, when the leaves are at their most aromatic. To harvest, use pruning shears to snip off the top leaves and stems, cutting just above a set of leaves. This encourages the plant to grow back and produce more leaves. After harvesting, hang the stems upside down in a cool, dry place to air dry, ensuring that the leaves retain their potency and flavor.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":41963551424692,"sku":"CAT","price":3.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"9000+ Count","offer_id":41963551490228,"sku":"CAT-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/catnip5_07c814ef-c3f5-4152-a163-782dee6b3568.jpg?v=1768495902"},{"product_id":"german-giant-radish","title":"German Giant Radish","description":"German Giant Radish is a bold and impressive heirloom variety that is sure to capture attention in your garden and kitchen. Known for its massive size, this radish grows much larger than typical varieties, with some reaching up to 3 inches in diameter, while still maintaining a crisp texture and refreshing, mildly spicy flavor. Its striking red skin and smooth, white flesh make it not only a culinary delight but also a visually stunning addition to your garden. The plants are fast-growing, often maturing in as little as 30 to 40 days, allowing for quick, satisfying harvests. German Giant Radish is perfect for gardeners looking to grow an eye-catching and productive crop, thriving in both cool spring and fall weather. The hardy, disease-resistant nature of this radish makes it low-maintenance and ideal for novice gardeners, while its versatility in the kitchen—from salads to stir-fries—makes it a must-have for anyone who loves to cook. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Raphanus Sativus, Giant Red Radish, Large German Radish, Big Root Radish, German Mammoth Radish, Jumbo Radish, Giant Winter Radish, Long Red Radish, Winter Giant Radish, German Mammoth Root.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRadish, German Giant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRaphanus sativus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e25-30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 9 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRoot, Rosette\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e If planting in a garden bed, radish can be planted more densely, at a rate of 16 plants per square foot.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant radish in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked and the soil reaches about 45F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds 8-10 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 4 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Radishes can also be double-planted (planted in pairs) down the rows. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. You may make several plantings 8-10 days apart for a steady supply of radishes. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply a complete fertilizer, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Read and follow fertilizer instructions for best application. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nRadishes are ready to be harvested when they reach their mature size, typically 3 to 4 weeks. To check for readiness, gently pull back the soil around the top of the root to see its size. Radishes left in the ground too long can become woody, pithy, or overly spicy. Harvest by firmly grasping the greens near the base and pulling them straight out of the soil. After harvesting, trim the greens to about 1 inch above the root, wash off any soil, and store them in the refrigerator. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"900+ Count","offer_id":40932213293236,"sku":"RADGG","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2700+ Count","offer_id":49231376679209,"sku":"RADGG-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5600+ Count","offer_id":52513915732265,"sku":"RADGG-6x","price":16.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"900+ Count \u0026 600+ Cherry Belle Radish","offer_id":52513915765033,"sku":"RADGG+RADCB","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/radish1_1ae0ff06-1392-4b4e-a68a-2468b6a306c7.jpg?v=1769529833"},{"product_id":"dwarf-jewel-mix-nasturtium","title":"Dwarf Jewel Mix Nasturtium","description":"Dwarf Jewel Mix Nasturtium brings brilliant color to any summer garden, offering a stunning burst of color with its fiery oranges, reds, yellows, corals, and pinks. This compact variety is perfect for smaller spaces or containers, yet still packs a punch with its showy, dainty flowers and lush, green foliage. Known for its ability to thrive in poor soil, Nasturtiums are a breeze to grow, making them a great option for both beginner gardeners and seasoned horticulturists alike. These versatile plants don’t just look beautiful—they’re edible too! The peppery flavor of the leaves and flowers makes them a delightful addition to salads, sandwiches, and garnishes, adding a zesty flair to your meals. In addition to their culinary uses, Nasturtiums attract beneficial pollinators like bees and butterflies, making them an excellent choice for encouraging biodiversity in your garden. They’re also known for their natural pest-repelling qualities, helping to protect other plants from aphids and other unwanted critters. If you’re looking for an easy-to-grow, multi-functional, and visually stunning plant to enhance your garden, Dwarf Jewel Mix Nasturtium is sure to impress!\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Dwarf Jewel Nasturtium, Jewel Mix Nasturtium, Jewel Blend Nasturtium, Mixed Color Nasturtium, Dwarf Mixed Nasturtium, Tropaelum Majus, Edible Nasturtium, Colorful Nasturtium, Compact Nasturtium.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNasturtium, Dwarf Jewel Mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTropaeolum nanum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual, Perennial 9-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nTo improve germination, scarify seeds by vigorously shake the seeds with course sand in a bag, or nick the hard seed coat with a file before planting. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor earlier blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 65F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant after all danger of frost has passed in spring. Fall planting is not recommended unless planting outdoors in environments with mild, frost-free winters, or planting indoors with supplemental grow lights. If fall planting, plant in containers to prepare to store plants indoors over winter.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 8 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole, then cover thinly with soil. In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered and gently watered in. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 8 inches apart to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding. Water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nNasturtiums are low-maintenance plants once established and require minimal care. During the growing season, water them regularly, especially during dry spells, but avoid overwatering as they prefer slightly drier conditions. They’re drought-tolerant once established, but occasional watering will help them grow strong and produce abundant blooms. Deadhead spent flowers regularly to encourage new blooms and prevent the plant from becoming leggy. You can also trim back any overgrown vines to maintain their shape and keep them looking tidy. Nasturtiums generally don’t need much fertilizer; in fact, they perform best in poor soil, as too much fertilizer can lead to lush foliage at the expense of flowers. If you want to encourage more blooms, you can add a balanced, slow-release fertilizer early in the growing season. Nasturtiums are relatively pest-resistant.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"200+ Count","offer_id":36857153192088,"sku":"NASDJ","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"600+ Count","offer_id":41032690598068,"sku":"NASDJ-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1,200+ Count","offer_id":52481554645289,"sku":"NASDJ-6x","price":15.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/nast2_d290a894-5ac4-41d3-ad93-cf0947d109ec.jpg?v=1769097699"},{"product_id":"giant-orange-california-poppy","title":"Giant Orange California Poppy","description":"Giant Orange California Poppy is the state flower of California, beaming large, showy cup-shaped flowers in radiant orange! The Giant Orange California Poppy boasts delicate yet resilient petals that create a stunning display of color. Its blossoms open during the day, revealing a burst of warm orange hues that brighten up any outdoor space. The flowers rest on slender, silvery green foliage, adding an elegant touch to its overall appearance. This drought-tolerant heirloom flower is native to the TomorrowSeeds and Mexico and flowers in spring and summer. Though cultivated as an ornamental plant, it has historically been harvested for a variety of uses and today may be used as a modern culinary ingredient and garnish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: California Sunlight, Cup of Gold Poppy, California State Flower, Coastal Poppy,  Orange Opium Poppy, Orange Oriental Poppy, Corn Poppy, Field Poppy.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePoppy, Giant Orange California\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eEschscholzia californica\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e70\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e1 - 2 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eSpreading, Upright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual, Perennial 8-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor earlier blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location very carefully when seedlings are less than 4 inches and the ground can be worked, about 2-4 weeks before the last average frost date; do not disturb roots when transplanting seedlings. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant as soon as the ground can be worked in spring, about 2-4 weeks before the last average frost date. Fall planting is not recommended unless planting outdoors in environments with mild, frost-free winters for a head start in the following spring, or planting indoors with supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/8 inch deep and spaced 8-12 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole, then cover thinly with soil. In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered and gently watered in. Water seeds after planting. Once seedlings emerge, try not to disturb roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8-12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCalifornia Poppies are low-maintenance and drought-tolerant once established. After planting, ensure they receive full sun for most of the day, as this will promote healthy growth and vibrant blooms. Water the plants lightly but regularly during the early stages, especially in dry periods, but once established, California poppies require very little watering. California Poppies thrive in poor soil, so avoid heavy fertilization. Deadheading spent flowers will help encourage continuous blooming throughout the season, although they are self-seeding and often continues to grow year after year. Keep an eye out for weeds, which may compete with the poppies, and remove them as needed.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":41963549819060,"sku":"PPYGO","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"18,000+ Count","offer_id":41963549851828,"sku":"PPYGO-3x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 Pound","offer_id":52486759219497,"sku":"PPYGO-1\/4LB","price":14.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound","offer_id":52486759252265,"sku":"PPYGO-1\/2LB","price":22.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/poppy1_5918a69a-274a-413c-9f37-d63b796edd32.jpg?v=1769171596"},{"product_id":"golden-beet","title":"Golden Beet","description":"Detroit Golden Beets are a rich, golden-yellow globe beet with faint light striping and very sweet! Golden Beets are a fantastic addition to any garden, offering both beauty and flavor. Their bright, golden-yellow color adds a vibrant touch to your garden and dishes, setting them apart from traditional red beets. Golden beets also will not bleed staining juices, unlike red beets.The flavor is milder and sweeter compared to red beets, with a smooth, earthy taste that shines when roasted, boiled, or eaten raw. These beets are perfect for a variety of culinary uses, from salads to soups, and their color adds a stunning visual appeal to your meals. Golden Beets are easy to grow and thrive in a wide range of climates, making them a great choice for gardeners of all experience levels. In addition to their great taste, they are rich in vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Yellow Beets, Golden Beets, Golden Detroit Red Beets, Yellow Detroit Beets, Amber Beets, Sun Gold Beets, Golden Globe Beets, Gold Beets, Golden Beetroot, Golden Globe Beet.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBeet, Detroit Golden\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBeta vulgaris\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e5-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e55\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eRoot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nBeets grows best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlant beets in the spring as soon as the soil can be worked, about 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date (beet germination is 50F-85F). For fall crops, direct sow seeds or transplant seedlings outdoors 4-6 weeks before the first average frost date. To plant, make holes 1\/2 inch deep and spaced 4 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Beets can also be planted in pairs down wider rows. Plant 1-3 seeds per hole, planting 2-3 seeds if choosing to thin to the strongest plant. When thinning, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/2 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBeets are ready to harvest once the roots reach 1 1\/2 to 3 inches in diameter, or leave in the ground longer for larger beets, about 50-70 days after planting. For the best flavor and tenderness, it’s recommended to harvest beets while they are still young. Beet greens can be harvested when they are young and tender for use in salads or cooking.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":36857291014296,"sku":"BEETG","price":4.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"300+ Count \u0026 600+ Detroit Red Beet","offer_id":52441335857449,"sku":"BEETG+BEETDR","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"900+ Count","offer_id":52441810403625,"sku":"BEETG-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/gbeet3_8c947397-ee6c-4725-9fd3-ed5818e3fd93.jpg?v=1768407739"},{"product_id":"golden-hubbard-squash","title":"Golden Hubbard Squash","description":"Golden Hubbard Squash is an attractive winter squash with a tear-drop shape and a deep orange-red or golden-red shell. The innards of this squash are golden-yellow, with a mild flavor and sweetness liken to a sweet potato or rich pumpkin. The rich, golden-yellow flesh offers a sweet, nutty flavor that is perfect for baking, roasting, and making hearty soups or pies. Known for its excellent storage qualities, Golden Hubbard can be kept for months after harvest, allowing you to enjoy its flavors well into the winter. Its thick skin provides natural protection, making it ideal for long-term storage or decorative displays. Whether you’re looking to elevate your garden with a visually stunning variety or seeking a reliable crop that delivers both taste and longevity, Golden Hubbard Squash is a versatile and rewarding choice.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nSquash is one of the plants grown in the traditional Native American vegetable growing technique called the Three Sisters. The other two plants in the Three Sisters are beans and corn. Each plant had its role in this companion planting tradition. Corn served as a structure for the vining beans to grow up. Squash served as a ground cover to prevent weeds from growing. Beans provided natural fertilizer for all.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Red Kuri Squash, Ambercup Pumpkin, Golden Hubbard, Yellow Hubbard, Golden Pumpkin, Winter Squash, Sweet Hubbard, Hubbard Squash, Golden Squash, Pumpkin Squash.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eWinter Squash, Golden Hubbard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCurcubita maxima\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e110\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e4 - 6 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 3 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nHubbard Squash grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish and prepare additional support for the heavy squash as they grow.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Hubbard Squash outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. Fall planting is not typically recommended unless planting in climates with mild winters (USDA Zones 9-11) - plant at least 3-4 months before the first expected frost date - or growing indoors at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish and prepare additional support for the heavy squash as they grow.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (trellis) or 8 feet (sprawl)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nHubbard Squash is ready to be harvested when the skin is hard, fully colored, and the stem has turned brown and dry, about 90 to 120 days after planting. The full size of Hubbard Squash can be up to 20 pounds and the rind should be tough enough that it cannot be easily pierced by a fingernail. To harvest, use a sharp knife or pruning shears to cut the squash from the vine, leaving a small portion of the stem attached. Handle the squash carefully to avoid bruising the skin. Harvest before the first frost for best storage. If frost is imminent and some squash are still on the vine, try to harvest them early and store them in a cool, dry place to allow them to finish ripening. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"40+ Count","offer_id":36857371197592,"sku":"HUBGD","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"120+ Count","offer_id":40949946024116,"sku":"HUBGD-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"40+ Count \u0026 40+ Blue Hubbard Squash","offer_id":52448213729577,"sku":"HUBGD+HUBBLUE","price":7.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"40+ Count \u0026 40+ Green Hubbard Squash","offer_id":52448213762345,"sku":"HUBGD+HUBGR","price":7.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/ghs2_10b33a3e-1d34-47c0-901b-181eb862f2a4.jpg?v=1768496723"},{"product_id":"top-crop-green-bean","title":"Top Crop Green Bean","description":"Top Crop Green Bean is an AAS Award-winning bush bean variety that has earned its reputation as a garden favorite being highly reliable and productive. Top Crop plants are compact and robust, producing an abundance of tender, stringless 6-7 inch long pods that are perfect for fresh eating, canning, or freezing. With a crisp texture and a mild, savory flavor, these beans are a delight to enjoy in salads, stir-fries, or as a side dish. Known for their early maturity, Top Crop beans deliver a harvest sooner than many other varieties, making them ideal for gardeners eager to enjoy fresh produce. Their exceptional resistance to common bean diseases ensures a healthy and hassle-free growing experience. Whether a beginner gardener or a seasoned pro, these beans are easy to grow and thrive in a variety of climates. Their uniform size and shape make them perfect for preserving, while their high yields mean you’ll have plenty to share with family and friends. Top Crop Green Beans are the perfect combination of flavor, reliability, and versatility for any garden.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Top Crop Green Bean, Top Crop Bean, Top Crop Bush Bean, Top Crop Snap Bean, Improved Top Crop Bean.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBean, Top Crop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003ePhaseolus vulgarus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6-10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e50\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e18 - 24 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eBush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of a low-nitrogen fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a low-nitrogen fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 18 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nGreen beans grow best in temperatures between 65F-85F. Direct-sowing is recommended. Plant green beans in the spring after all danger of frost has passed and the soil temperature reaches at least 60F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 7-9 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 1 seed per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, plant 2-3 seeds per hole, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-24 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2-3 times a week. Water especially during flowering and pod formation. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once plants start forming pods, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a low-nitrogen fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nGreen Beans can be harvested when the pods are firm, well-filled, and still tender, but before they become too mature and tough, about 50-60 days after planting. For the best flavor and texture, harvest green beans when they are young and the seeds inside have not yet fully developed. The beans should be bright and crisp, and the pods should snap easily when bent. To harvest, gently pick the beans by hand or use garden shears to cut the stem, leaving the pod intact. Be sure to harvest regularly, as this encourages the plant to continue producing more beans. If beans are left too long on the plant, they can become tough and stringy. Green beans can be eaten fresh, frozen for later use, or preserved through canning.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"30+ Count","offer_id":36857483231384,"sku":"GBTOPC","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"90+ Count","offer_id":40564416512180,"sku":"GBTOPC-3x","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"180+ Count","offer_id":52448200622377,"sku":"GBTOPC-6x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30+ Golden Wax Bean","offer_id":52448200655145,"sku":"GBTOPC+YWAXGW","price":5.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30+ Royal Burgundy Bean","offer_id":52448200687913,"sku":"GBTOPC+ROYB","price":5.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"30+ Count \u0026 30+ Golden Wax Bean \u0026 30+ Royal Burgundy Bean","offer_id":52448200720681,"sku":"GBTOPC+YWAXGW+ROYB","price":9.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/greenbean2_0c9983c1-26dd-4e5c-84f5-420638b57dd7.jpg?v=1768496592"},{"product_id":"black-seeded-simpson-green-leaf-lettuce","title":"Black Seeded Simpson Green Leaf Lettuce","description":"Black Seeded Simpson Lettuce features bright green, tender, curly leaves, and is a crunchy and delicious addition to sandwiches, burgers, and salads. This attractive, ruffled variety of green leaf lettuce is also a popular choice for food bars and commercial garnishes. The plant is exceptionally hardy and grows quickly, often reaching full maturity in as little as 40 days. The leaves are perfect for fresh salads, adding a light, crunchy texture that complements any dish. This variety is also incredibly easy to grow, making it a great option for beginner gardeners or anyone looking for a low-maintenance crop. Its compact growth habit makes it perfect for small spaces, container gardens, or even window boxes. With its early harvest time and adaptability, Black Seeded Simpson Lettuce offers a rewarding gardening experience and delicious, fresh greens for your meals. Known for its vibrant green color and delicate texture, this loose-leaf lettuce thrives in cool weather and can be harvested early, making it an excellent choice for spring and fall gardens.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Simpson Lettuce, Black Seeded Simpson, Simpson Green Lettuce, Summer Lettuce, Early Lettuce, Leaf Lettuce, Loose-Leaf Lettuce, Fast-growing Lettuce, Crisp Lettuce, Tender Leaf Lettuce.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eLettuce, Black Seeded Simpson Leaf\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eLactuca sativa var. crispa\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e28-44\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e10 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6- 12 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eUpright\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 12 inches apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nPlanting lettuce in cooler weather helps prevent bolting, which can occur in hot temperatures (lettuce grows best in 45F-75F temperatures). \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 3-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 50F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying roots in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant in spring when the soil warms to at least 50F. For fall crops, direct sow seeds outdoors 4-8 weeks before the first frost. To plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 8 inches apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole or broadcast and separate once seedlings emerge. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. For a continuous harvest, plant successive crops every 2 to 3 weeks.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-18 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once a week. If there is no rainfall, water 2 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around the plants helps retain moisture and suppress weeds.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 3-4 weeks after planting, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nBlack Seeded Simpson Lettuce can be harvested as early as 28 days for baby greens or 40 to 50 days for full-sized leaves. Pick outer leaves as needed, while leaving the center leaves to continue growing for a continuous harvest. For a full harvest, cut the plant at the base when it reaches 8 to 12 inches tall. Regularly picking leaves encourages new growth and prevents bolting, especially in warm weather. Harvest before bolting for best flavor.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"2000+ Count","offer_id":41963549622452,"sku":"LETBSS","price":4.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6000+ Count","offer_id":41963549655220,"sku":"LETBSS-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Gourmet Mix Lettuce","offer_id":52476903883049,"sku":"LETBSS+LETGM","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Buttercrunch Butterhead Lettuce","offer_id":52476903915817,"sku":"LETBSS+LETBBL","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Parris Island Romaine Lettuce","offer_id":52476903948585,"sku":"LETBSS+LETROME","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2000+ Count \u0026 2000+ Crisphead Iceberg Lettuce","offer_id":52476903981353,"sku":"LETBSS+LETICE","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/bssl2_2286cf77-e06c-40c2-afb5-f14c27ac8741.jpg?v=1769022425"},{"product_id":"green-striped-cushaw","title":"Green Striped Cushaw","description":"Green Striped Cushaw is a gorgeous giant green and white streaked crookneck Winter squash growing over 12 inches long! This mildly sweet and meaty squash originates from the south of Mexico and delicious as pie filling, cushaw butter, puddings, or roasted in soups, pies, stews, and curries. It grows vigorously in warm climates and is highly adaptable to different soil types, making it an excellent choice for gardeners seeking a low-maintenance, high-yielding crop. Not only is it great for culinary use, but it also stores well, allowing gardeners to enjoy the harvest long after the growing season ends. Save the seeds to roast for snacking or pureeing into sauces, which was believed to have medicinal properties.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nSquash is one of the plants grown in the traditional Native American vegetable growing technique called the Three Sisters. The other two plants in the Three Sisters are beans and corn. Each plant had its role in this companion planting tradition. Corn served as a structure for the vining beans to grow up. Squash served as a ground cover to prevent weeds from growing. Beans provided natural fertilizer for all.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Silver Seed Gourd, Japanese Pie Pumpkin, Cushaw Pumpkin, Kershaw, Tennessee Sweet Potato Squash, Sweet Potato Pumpkin, Sweet Potato Squash, Striped Cushaw, Tennessee Squash.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCushaw, Green Striped\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCurcubita argyrosperma\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e110\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 4 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e6 - 8 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-9\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 4 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCushaw Squash grows best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 2-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Cushaw Squash outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. Fall planting is not typically recommended unless planting in climates with mild winters (USDA Zones 9-11) - plant at least 3-4 months before the first expected frost date - or growing indoors at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 4 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish, spacing plants 3 feet apart at the base. \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (trellis) or 8 feet (sprawl)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCushaw squash is ready to harvest when the skin turns a deep color, and feels firm to the touch. The vines begin to die back, signaling that the squash has matured, usually 90 to 120 days after planting. If the skin is hard and resistant to nail puncture, cushaw is fully developed. To harvest, use a sharp knife or pruning shears to cut the squash from the vine, leaving about 2-3 inches of the stem intact to help with storage. Harvesting before the first frost is crucial as cushaw squash is sensitive to cold.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"40+ Count","offer_id":36857918226584,"sku":"CUSH","price":4.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"120+ Count","offer_id":40953727778996,"sku":"CUSH-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"40+ Count \u0026 20+ Count Orange Striped Cushaw","offer_id":52448175784233,"sku":"CUSH+CUSHO","price":7.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/cush28.1_63538299-b5e0-4f4f-914b-84cdd0d20a2a.jpg?v=1768496308"},{"product_id":"heavenly-blue-morning-glory","title":"Heavenly Blue Morning Glory","description":"Heavenly Blue Morning Glory is a breathtaking addition to any garden, renowned for its vibrant, sky-blue, trumpet-shaped flowers with yellow-white throats that unfurl with the dawn. This fast-growing, perennial vine is adorned with heart-shaped leaves and trumpet-like flowers that create a stunning visual display each morning. Ideal for trellises, fences, or hanging baskets, it effortlessly adds a touch of elegance to any space. The enchanting blooms attract pollinators such as bees and hummingbirds, turning your garden into a lively, buzzing paradise. Its rapid growth provides almost immediate visual impact, transforming bland spaces into a cascade of color in just a short time. Known for its resilience, the Heavenly Blue Morning Glory tolerates a variety of soil types, making it suitable for both novice and seasoned gardeners. Perfect for gardeners looking to add vibrant color to vertical spaces, this beautiful vine is sure to bring joy and beauty year after year.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Blue Dawn Flower, Sky Blue Morning Glory, Heavenly Morning Vine, Blue Star Morning Glory, Azure Morning Glory, Celestial Blue Morning Glory, Paradise Blue Morning Glory, Heavenly Sky Climber, Sapphire Morning Glory.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eMorning Glory, Heavenly Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eIpomoea tricolor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Bloom:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e90-120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e8 - 10 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2 - 3 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBloom Diameter:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3 - 5 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual, Perennial 10-12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 6-8 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots. If the soil is heavy or clay-like, mix in some sand or compost to improve drainage. Optionally, form hills or ridges of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 6 inches apart at the base of a trellis. This formation of hills or ridges will help with drainage, ensure good airflow, and make harvesting for cut flowers easier. To prepare a trellis, choose a sturdy structure such as an arbor, fence, or pergola. If using a wall or post, attach garden netting or string for the vines to climb. Lay down 1\/2\"-3\/4\" peat moss, sawdust, or potting soil, the soil surface. This layer is beneficial for flower seeds because it can the improve the germination environment and prevent soil crusting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nTo improve germination, scarify seeds by vigorously shake the seeds with course sand in a bag, or nick the hard seed coat with a file before planting. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor earlier blooms, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 4-6 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 60F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when temperatures are consistently above 60F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the transplant holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing outdoors, plant after all danger of frost has passed in spring and soil temperatures reach at least 60F. Morning glories can be planted in the fall in warmer climates or indoors with supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nTo plant, make holes 1\/4 inch deep and spaced 6-12 inches apart at the base of the prepared trellis. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole, then cover thinly with soil. In small plots, flower seeds may be scattered and gently watered in. Once seedlings emerge, plants can separated and spaced 6-12 inches apart at the base of the prepared trellis to allow room for mature plants to spread and prevent overcrowding. Water after planting.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6-12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6-12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nMorning Glories require minimal care throughout the growing season. Water regularly, especially during dry periods, ensuring the soil remains moist but not waterlogged. Once established, they are fairly drought-tolerant. Provide a sturdy trellis or support for their vigorous climbing habit, as they can quickly overtake other plants or structures. As the vines grow, gently guide them toward the trellis by wrapping young tendrils around the structure. Morning glories naturally twine and will climb on their own, but occasional training may be needed. If necessary, use soft plant ties or twine to help secure the stems. Regularly check the vines to ensure they are growing in the desired direction and trim any excessive growth to keep them manageable. Fertilizing is generally unnecessary, but a light application of a balanced fertilizer can promote healthy growth if the soil is poor. Remove spent blooms to encourage continuous flowering, though morning glories readily self-seed.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"500+ Count","offer_id":36858085277848,"sku":"MGHB","price":4.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1500+ Count","offer_id":41032932884660,"sku":"MGHB-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3000+ Count","offer_id":52481547010345,"sku":"MGHB-6x","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/2 Pound ~ 7,500+ Count","offer_id":52481547043113,"sku":"MGHB-1\/2LB","price":14.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Pound ~ 15,000+ Count","offer_id":52481547075881,"sku":"MGHB-1LB","price":24.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"500+ Count \u0026 500+ Grandpa Ott's Purple Morning Glory","offer_id":52481547108649,"sku":"MGHB+MGGO","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"500+ Count \u0026 500+ Scarlet O'Hara Morning Glory","offer_id":52481547141417,"sku":"MGHB+MGSCAR","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"500+ Count \u0026 500+ Grandpa Ott's Purple Morning Glory \u0026 500+ Scarlet O'Hara Morning Glory","offer_id":52481547174185,"sku":"MGHB+MGGO+MGSCAR","price":11.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/files\/blue2_37418404-7c00-4efe-93cf-727de484e97f.jpg?v=1769095379"},{"product_id":"rocky-ford-green-cantaloupe","title":"Rocky Ford Green Cantaloupe","description":"Rocky Ford Green Flesh Melon is a must-have for melon lovers, known for its rich, sweet flavor and smooth texture. This is popular heirloom originates from the Rocky Ford region in Colorado, which is famous for its sweet and flavorful 2-pound melons. Rocky Ford Melon's unique green flesh has a vibrant color and is incredibly juicy. Its firm yet tender texture holds up well when sliced, making it perfect for fruit salads, smoothies, or as a snack on its own. Rich in nutrients like vitamin C, potassium, and fiber, the Rocky Ford Green Flesh Melon is not only delicious but also a healthy addition to any diet. This carefully curated variety was made possible by the Rocky Ford Cantaloupe Seed Breeders Association. \u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\nAlso Known As: Rocky Ford Melon, Green Flesh Cantaloupe, Rocky Ford Cantaloupe, Rocky Ford Galia, Green Melon, Green Fleshed Cantaloupe, Muskmelon, Cantaloupe, Honeydew Melon, Orange Melon.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eMelon, Rocky Ford Green Flesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLatin Name:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eCucumis melo var. reticulatus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Germinate:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e7-14\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDays to Harvest:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e70-90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant Height:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e12 - 18 Inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-6 Feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth Habit:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eVining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSDA Zones:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e3-11\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifespan:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eAnnual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eTomorrowSeeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunlight:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eFull Sun, Partial Shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePollination:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eHeirloom, Open-Pollinated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGMO:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFungicide-Treated Seeds*:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeeds Packed For**:\u003c\/td\u003e   \u003ctd\u003e2025\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e*Fungicide-treated seeds protect the seedlings from diseases until they are up and growing. Do not eat treated seeds.\u003cbr\u003e\n**Seeds are freshly packed for the growing season of the year listed. Seeds are still viable beyond pack date. Store in a cool and dry location such as the refrigerator or basement to best preserve germination rates.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanting Instructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoil Preparation:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose an area with heavy, well-draining soil that receives at least 6 hours of sunlight each day. Remove weeds, large rocks, and litter from the planting area. Leave small weeds and dead grass, they will enrich the soil when turned under. Spade or till the soil 8-12 inches deep. Loosening the soil will help the plant establish strong roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\nPlants grow best in soil with lots of organic matter. You may optionally add fertilizer or organic material such as compost, leaves, or rotted hay to mix into the soil at this point. For small gardens, scatter 2-3 tablespoons of fertilizer evenly and work into the top 2-3 inches of soil for each hill or 2 foot by 2 foot planting area. For larger gardens, scatter 2-3 pounds of a complete fertilizer for each 100 square feet of planting area. Work fertilizer or organic material into the soil and leave the surface smooth.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nForm rows of soil beds 4-6 inches high and at least 6 feet apart. This formation of ridges will help with drainage.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlanting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\nCantaloupe melons grow best in warm weather. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cb\u003eStarting Indoors: \u003c\/b\u003eFor an earlier harvest, you may optionally start planting indoors in containers 3-4 weeks before the last expected frost date in Spring, keeping seedlings at least 70F. Harden off then transplant seedlings outdoors in a sunny location when the soil temperature is above 65F. To transplant seedlings, prepare a transplant hole outdoors in a sunny location. Remove the plants carefully from the pots or flats and set them in the holes, burying some of the stem in the ground. Pack the soil loosely around the plant and leave a slightly sunken area around each plant to hold water. Water the plants after transplanting. Optionally, Train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\n\u003cb\u003eDirectly Sowing:\u003c\/b\u003e If directly sowing Cantaloupe melon outdoors, plant in mid-late spring when the soil warms to at least 70F. If Fall planting, sow in early summer, at least 13-16 weeks before the first expected frost date - or if growing indoors, keep at \u0026gt;70F using supplemental grow lights.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\nTo plant, make holes 1 inch deep and spaced 3 feet apart down the rows of raised beds. Plant 2-3 seeds per hole. If choosing to thin to the strongest plant, determine the strongest and healthiest plant, then remove all other plants, narrowing to a single plant per hole. Cover seeds thinly with soil and water after planting. Optionally, train plants to climb a 6-8 foot trellis or fence as they establish, spacing plants 18 inches apart at the base of the trellis.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n \n \u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ctable\u003e \u003ctr\u003e \u003ctd\u003ePlanting Depth:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWithin-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 feet (sprawl) or 18 inches (trellis)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetween-Row Spacing:\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 feet\u003c\/td\u003e \u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCare During the Season:\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eWatering:\u003c\/b\u003e Water the plants deeply, soaking the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches, once to twice a week. If there is no rainfall, water 3-4 times a week. Sandy soils may need to be watered more often than heavy clay soils. Mulching around plants can help retain moisture.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eWeeding:\u003c\/b\u003e Keeping plants weed-free improves production. If plowing or hoeing, do not dig deeper than 1 inch to prevent from cutting the feeder roots.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eFertilizing:\u003c\/b\u003e Once seedlings are established, 2-3 weeks after germination, you may optionally apply 2 tablespoons of a complete fertilizer around each hole, or 1-2 pounds per 100 square feet, without letting the fertilizer touch the plants. Optionally, continue fertilizing every 3-4 weeks as plants grow, especially after flowering begins. Water plants after fertilizing.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e \n\u003cb\u003eInsecticides:\u003c\/b\u003e Insecticides may be used to protect plants. Bt-based insecticides and sulfur are organic options that can be used for prevention. Sulfur also has fungicidal properties and helps in controlling many diseases. Before using a pesticide, read the label and follow cautions, warnings and directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDiseases:\u003c\/b\u003e If spots or mold appear, treat plants with an approved fungicide. Neem oil, sulfur, and other fungicides may be used. When using fungicides always follow label directions.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarvesting:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\n\nCantaloupe melons are ready to harvest when they have reached full size and their skin color has changed to a golden or yellowish hue. The melon should feel heavy for its size, indicating it has reached its peak ripeness. Gently press on the top near the stem - if it slightly indents, it is a good sign the melon is ready. The stem should also begin to dry and separate easily from the fruit. For the best flavor, harvest cantaloupe when it has a strong, sweet aroma and the skin underneath is slightly netted. When harvesting, use a sharp knife or pruning shears to cut the melon from the vine, leaving a short piece of stem attached to the fruit.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TomorrowSeeds","offers":[{"title":"100+ Count","offer_id":36869347999896,"sku":"CANTRF","price":3.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"300+ Count","offer_id":40888835834036,"sku":"CANTRF-3x","price":8.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"100+ Count \u0026 100+ Honey Rock Cantaloupe","offer_id":52448143606057,"sku":"CANTRF+CANTHR","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"100+ Count \u0026 100+ Green Flesh Honeydew","offer_id":52448143638825,"sku":"CANTRF+HONGF","price":6.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0458\/0248\/7960\/collections\/corngg_43.jpg?v=1644952082","url":"https:\/\/tomorrowseeds.com\/hi\/collections\/newest-products.oembed?page=4","provider":"TomorrowSeeds","version":"1.0","type":"link"}